Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 307

NWD-104045-11E

Network Configuration Toolj


Operation Manual
(Java version)

NEC Corporation
Copyright 2013

NWD-104045

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Document Warranty ......................................................................................................................... 1
1 Network Configuration Toolj ........................................................................................................ 2
1.1

Purpose ................................................................................................................................ 2

1.2

Definitions, Acronyms and Abbreviations ............................................................................ 3

2 NetCfgToolj Operation ................................................................................................................. 5


2.1

The NetCfgToolj Screen ...................................................................................................... 5

2.2

NetCfgToolj Command Menu Structure............................................................................... 6

2.3

Starting NetCfgToolj ............................................................................................................. 7

2.4

Exiting NetCfgToolj .............................................................................................................. 7

2.5

Creating a New Network Configuration Workspace ............................................................ 8

2.6

Opening an Existing Workspace (*.nct) ............................................................................... 8

2.7

Network Properties: Naming the Individual Networks in a Workspace ............................... 9

2.8

Network Properties: Network Address and Subnet Setting ................................................. 9

2.9

Editing Workspace ............................................................................................................. 12

2.9.1

Adding a New Network Element (NE) ........................................................................ 12

2.9.2

Adding Back-to-back Line (cable)............................................................................... 13

2.9.3

Adding DSC/SV Line (radio) ....................................................................................... 13

2.9.4

Back-to-Back Line Color Codes ................................................................................. 14

2.9.5

Deleting a Network Element (NE)............................................................................... 15

2.9.6

Deleting a Line (cable) ................................................................................................ 15

2.9.7

Enabling NE Bridge NE mode .................................................................................... 16

2.9.8

Changing PASOLINK mode of NE (to NEO) .............................................................. 18

2.9.9

Setting or Modifying NE Properties of PASOLINK V3 and PASOLINK V4 ................ 19

2.9.10 Setting Properties of MIU (Line Concentrator) ........................................................... 27


2.9.11 Setting Properties of MIU (Hop) ................................................................................. 35
2.9.12 Setting NE Properties of PASOLINK Mx and PASOLINK+ ........................................ 44
2.9.13 Setting NE Properties of PASOLINK Mx (Bridge NE), PASOLINK+ STM-1 (Bridge NE)
and PASOLINK+ PDH (Bridge NE) ............................................................................ 52
2.9.14 Setting NE Properties of PASOLINK NEO ................................................................. 59
2.9.15 Setting NE Properties of PASOLINK NEO (1NE) ...................................................... 67
2.9.16 Setting NE Properties of PASOLINK NEO CPV ........................................................ 77
2.9.17 Setting NE Properties of PASOLINK NEO CPV (1NE) .............................................. 85
2.9.18 Setting NE Properties of PASOLINK NEO NODAL ................................................... 93
2.9.19 Setting NE Properties of PASOLINK NEO/a ............................................................ 109
2.9.20 Setting NE Properties of PASOLINK NEO HP ......................................................... 130
2.9.21 Setting NE Properties of PASOLINK NEO HP/A ..................................................... 138
2.9.22 Setting NE Properties of 5000S................................................................................ 146

-i-

NWD-104045

2.9.23 Setting NE Properties of 5000S (1NE) ..................................................................... 154


2.9.24 Setting NE Properties of iPASOLINK 200 ................................................................ 165
2.9.25 Setting NE Properties of iPASOLINK 200 (1NE) ..................................................... 173
2.9.26 Setting NE Properties of iPASOLINK 400 ................................................................ 181
2.9.27 Setting NE Properties of iPASOLINK 400 (1NE) ..................................................... 189
2.9.28 Setting NE Properties of iPASOLINK 1000 .............................................................. 197
2.9.29 Setting NE Properties of 5000iPS ............................................................................ 205
2.9.30 Setting NE Properties of iPASOLINK EX ................................................................. 213
2.9.31 Setting NE Properties of iPASOLINK SX ................................................................. 219
2.9.32 Setting Line Properties ............................................................................................. 223
2.10 Creating Configuration ..................................................................................................... 226
2.11 Creating Configuration (All Networks) ............................................................................. 228
2.12 Changed NEs List ............................................................................................................ 229
2.13 Viewing the Network Element List ................................................................................... 230
2.14 Exporting Network Configuration Files ............................................................................ 234
2.14.1 Exporting Network Configuration Files for PM Card ................................................ 234
2.15 Saving Current Workspace .............................................................................................. 236
2.16 Printing Current Network .................................................................................................. 237
2.17 Network Address File Exporting....................................................................................... 239
2.18 Network Address File Importing ....................................................................................... 240
2.19 Setting Default Subnet Mask ........................................................................................... 242
2.20 Network Sort..................................................................................................................... 245
2.21 Time Zone Setting ............................................................................................................ 247
2.22 NTP Setting ...................................................................................................................... 248
2.23 SNMP Setting ................................................................................................................... 249
2.24 About Network Configuration Toolj .................................................................................. 250
3 Multiple CPMC Workspace ..................................................................................................... 251
Appendix A: MIU Settings ............................................................................................................ 253
Appendix B: Subnets .................................................................................................................... 254
Appendix C: Configuration of Dual Master MIU ........................................................................... 257
Appendix D: Incorrect Configuration of MIU (Line Concentrator) ................................................ 258
Appendix E: Incorrect Configuration of PASOLINK Mx / PASOLINK+......................................... 259
Appendix F: NMS Port Setting of MIU (Line Concentrator / Hop) ............................................... 261
Appendix G: Incorrect Configuration of PASOLINK NEO (or iPASOLINK or ALL OUTDOOR) /
PASOLINK Mx (Bridge NE) / PASOLINK+ STM-1 (Bridge NE) / PASOLINK+ PDH
(Bridge NE) (No.1) .................................................................................................... 264
Appendix H: Incorrect Configuration of iPASOLINK/ ALL OUTDOOR/ PASOLINK NEO/
PASOLINK Mx (Bridge NE) / PASOLINK+ STM-1 (Bridge NE) / PASOLINK+ PDH
(Bridge NE) (No.2) .................................................................................................... 266
Appendix I: Incorrect Configuration of PASOLINK NEO / iPASOLINK / ALL OUTDOOR .......... 268

- ii -

NWD-104045

Appendix J: How to Change Standard PASOLINK Mx / PASOLINK+ STM-1 / PASOLINK+ PDH


Configuration to PASOLINK Mx (Bridge NE) / PASOLINK+ STM-1 (Bridge NE) /
PASOLINK+ PDH (Bridge NE) ................................................................................. 269
Appendix K: How to change PASOLINK Mx (Bridge NE) / PASOLINK+ STM-1 (Bridge NE) /
PASOLINK+ PDH (Bridge NE) to NEO .................................................................... 273
Appendix L: Restrictions and limitations of PASOLINK NEO NODAL ........................................ 277
Appendix M: Restrictions and limitations on configuring Ring by NEO STD and NEO HP/A NEs
.................................................................................................................................. 281
Appendix N: Restrictions and limitations on configuring Ring by iPASOLINK NEs and ALL
OUTDOOR NEs ....................................................................................................... 288
Appendix O: How to connect iPASOLINK series to PASOLINK series by Async connection .... 290
Appendix P: Configuration of bridge NE and PASOLINK series ................................................. 291
Appendix Q: SNTP Configuration for networks with iPASOLINK/ ALL OUTDOOR .................... 292
Appendix R: iPASOLINK 400 NE1 port by DCN .......................................................................... 293
Appendix S: Adding iPASOLINK 100E NE using NCT workaround mode .................................. 294
Appendix T: Unsupported Configuration in iPASOLINK 100E network....................................... 297
Appendix U: Unsupported Configuration of iPASOLINK 1000 .................................................... 298
Appendix V: How to set the iPASOLINK 1000 of system varying in each direction .................... 299
Appendix W: Duplicate Checking of MIB Load NE IP Address ................................................... 300
Appendix X: Changed Configuration files of 5000iPS ................................................................. 303

- iii -

NWD-104045

Document Warranty
1. The information contained in this document is subject to change without prior notice.
2. The NetCfgToolj screen figures in this manual are only examples. Screens will vary according to
equipment configuration, operation modes, setting parameters, NetCfgToolj application program
version, etc. Screens contained in this manual are current at publication, however, they may
differ from actual screens on your NetCfgToolj.

- 1-

NWD-104045

Network Configuration Toolj


The Network Configuration Toolj (NetCfgToolj) is an optional application tool for the PASOLINK
Network Management System, which provides an easy to use graphical interface in building
NEC PASOLINK networks. It is a powerful tool used to generate configuration files for the
PASOLINK Management Cards (PMC) and network connection data files for the PASOLINK
Network Management System (PNMS).

1.1

Purpose
This document illustrates the use of the NetCfgToolj. The explanation focuses on the common
functions of the NetCfgToolj and therefore is for general-purpose operational use. Moreover, the
NEC PNMS is also briefly described to provide users with an overall understanding of the NEC
PASOLINK NMS.
Conventions Used in this Manual

Font
Italic
Hostname
Bold

What the Font Represents


For manual titles or related document
names.
Items on the user interface.
Items on the computer display.

[Button]

File and directory names.


Buttons on the user interface.

Menu Items

A menu name followed by a colon (:) means


that you must select the menu and then
item.
When the item is followed by an arrow ( ),
a cascading menu follows.

- 2-

Example
Please refer to PASOLINK Operation
Manual for details.
The Overall window ...

Click on [OK] button to continue ...


Click on [Execute] button to send
command.
Select System Login/Logout

NWD-104045

1.2

Definitions, Acronyms and Abbreviations

PNMS
PNMT
PMC/CTRL

CPMC / CPM (for PASOLINK


PASOLINK V4,MIU only)

V3,

Root NE (for PASOLINK NEO,


PASOLINK NEO CPV,
PASOLINK NEO NODAL,
PASOLINK NEO/a,
PASOLINK NEO HP,
PASOLINK NEO HP/A,
iPASOLINK 200,
iPASOLINK 400,
iPASOLINK 1000,
5000iPS,
5000S,
PASOLINK+ STM-1,
PASOLINK+ PDH,
PASOLINK Mx,
iPASOLINK EX,
iPASOLINK SX only)
RPMC / RPM (for PASOLINK V3,
PASOLINK V4,MIU only)

PASOLINK Network Management System


PASOLINK Network Management Terminal
PASOLINK Management Card. (for PASOLINK
V3/PASOLINK V4/MIU only.)
Control (CTRL) Module for PASOLINK NEO/PASOLINK NEO
CPV/PASOLINK NEO NODAL/(PASOLINK
NEO/a)/PASOLINK NEO HP/(PASOLINK NEO
HP/A)/iPASOLINK 200/iPASOLINK 400/iPASOLINK 1000/
5000iPS/5000S/PASOLINK+ STM-1/PASOLINK+
PDH/PASOLINK Mx/iPASOLINK EX/iPASOLINK SX only.
Central PMC/CTRL. The PMC/CTRL located on the central
station's IDU and is directly connected to the PNMS. Acts as
the master in the HDLC chain and is responsible for polling
other PMC/CTRL in its network. A C symbol is displayed as
part of CPM NE icon. An R symbol is displayed as part of the
Root NE icon.

Remote PMC/CTRL. The PMC/CTRL located on the remote


sites that are configured as slaves.

Normal NE (for PASOLINK NEO,


PASOLINK NEO CPV,
PASOLINK NEO NODAL,
PASOLINK NEO NEO/a,
PASOLINK NEO HP,
PASOLINK NEO HP/A,
iPASOLINK 200,
iPASOLINK 400,
iPASOLINK 1000,
5000iPS,
5000S,
PASOLINK+ STM-1,
PASOLINK+ PDH,
PASOLINK Mx,
iPASOLINK EX,
iPASOLINK SX only)

- 3-

NWD-104045

SCPMC / SCPM (for PASOLINK


V3,PASOLINK V4,MIU only)
Branch NE (for PASOLINK NEO,
PASOLINK NEO CPV,
PASOLINK NEO NODAL,
PASOLINK NEO NEO/a,
PASOLINK NEO HP,
PASOLINK NEO HP/A
iPASOLINK 200,
iPASOLINK 400,
iPASOLINK 1000,
5000iPS,
5000S,
PASOLINK+ STM-1,
PASOLINK+ PDH,
PASOLINK Mx,
iPASOLINK EX only)
RCP
NE
ODU
IDU
HDLC
DSC
PPP
SNTP
NTP
SNMP

Sub-Central PMC/CTRL. A PMC/CTRL located in the remote


site and is configured as slave to the CPMC/Root NE but is a
master to the sub-network below it. An S symbol is
displayed as part of SCPM NE icon. A B symbol is displayed
as part of Branch NE icon. Furthermore, A light blue B
symbol indicates that no further subnet group can be
spawned from this subnet group, while a yellow B symbol
indicates otherwise.

Radio Control Package for PASOLINK NEO/a.


Network Element. Node.
Outdoor Unit
Indoor Unit
High-level Data Link Control protocol
Digital Service Channel
Point to Point Protocol
Simple Network Time Protocol
Network Time Protocol
Simple Network Management Protocol

- 4-

NWD-104045

NetCfgToolj Operation

2.1

The NetCfgToolj Screen


The NetCfgToolj window is composed of the following main areas.
Title Bar
The title bar is used to indicate the title of the window.
Common Menu Bar
The common menu bar of the window presents the System and Help options, and indicates
which commands can be executed from among the various options. The Help function can also
display a pdf version of this operation manual.
One Touch Expandable Button / Divider
Initially the PNMT screen is split evenly to display the data from the two NEs within a hop by
using a divider. Click this button to move the divider to the edge of the window.

Title Bar

One Touch
Expandable
Button

Workspace

Common
Menu Bar

Common
Tool Bar

Total no. of NE

Divider

Network overview

- 5-

Total no. of NEs selected


in the network

NWD-104045

2.2

NetCfgToolj Command Menu Structure


File
New
Open
Save
Save As
Print Area
Print
Export
Changed NEs List

Setting
Clear
Configuration Files for PM Card
File for PNMS

Exit Application
Edit
Undo
Redo

Main Menu
File
Edit
Network
Tools
Help

Copy
Paste
Delete

PASOLINK NEO (HOP)

Highlighting ON
Highlighting OFF

Branch NE/SCPMC
Normal NE/RPMC

Switch to Network Element Type

PASOLINK
PASOLINK+
PASOLINK NEO
iPASOLINK
ALL OUTDOOR

Change PMC Type


Select All
Select
Add Network Element
Add BB Line
Add DSC/SV Link

PASOLINK
PASOLINK+
PASOLINK NEO
iPASOLINK
Trunk Radio
ALL OUTDOOR

Default Subnet Mask


Network Element Type
Network
New
Copy
Paste
Delete
Sort

Ascending order
Descending order
Customize order

Switch to Bridge NE mode


Import Network Address
Export Network Address

Properties
Tools
Create Configuration
Create Configuration (All Networks)
Network Element List
Settings Bundle
Help
Help
About NetConfigToolj

Time Zone Setting


NTP Setting
SNMP Setting
NetConfigToolj.pdf

- 6-

NWD-104045

2.3

Starting NetCfgToolj
To start NetCfgToolj:
1. Go to Start Programs NetCfgToolj NetCfgToolj from the Windows OS Start
menu.
2. NetCfgToolj main window will be displayed.

2.4

Exiting NetCfgToolj
To exit the NetCfgToolj application:
1. Go to File Exit Application in the main menu.

- 7-

NWD-104045

2.5

Creating a New Network Configuration Workspace


To start creating new workspace:
1. Go to File New in the main menu.
2. A blank workspace will be displayed.
3. If a workspace is currently loaded, a pop-up message will appear to remind the user to
save the current workspace before opening a new one. Click the [Cancel] button and
save the current workspace and repeat step 1.
4. Start creating and editing network configuration workspace.

2.6

Opening an Existing Workspace (*.nct)


NetCfgToolj allows you to save a workspace in *.nct file format so that you can open and modify
the current network configuration. Once you load an existing/current workspace you will be able
to modify, delete or add NEs in the network. (See also 2.15 Saving Current Workspace.)
To open an existing workspace:
1. Click on File Open in the
main menu of the main window.
2. Select the *.nct file of the
workspace from the list.
3. Click [Open] button.
4. If a workspace is currently
loaded, a pop-up message will
appear to remind the user to
save the current workspace
before opening a new one.
Click [Cancel] button and save
the current workspace and
repeat step 1.
5. Verify that the correct workspace is opened in the main window.

- 8-

NWD-104045

2.7

Network Properties: Naming the Individual Networks in a Workspace


Since one workspace can contain a number of networks, the NetCfgToolj allows you to provide
useful names to each of the networks. By default, Network-x, where x is the network number, is
assigned.
To set the network name:

1. Click on Network
Properties from the main menu
or right click anywhere in the
current Network window to
open the Network Properties
window.
2. Enter the desired name for this
workspace/network in the
Network Name box.
3. Click on [OK] button to save the
new setting.

2.8

Network Properties: Network Address and Subnet Setting


The IP addresses assigned by the NetCfgToolj to selected network depend on the assigned
Network Address and Subnet Mask in the Network Properties window.
To set the subnet of the selected network:
1. Click on Network
Properties from the main
menu or right click anywhere
in the current Network
window to open the Network
Properties window.

2. Click on Subnet category in


the Network Properties
window.
3. By default the NetCfgToolj
will utilize the private
network address 172.18.0.0 with subnet mask 255.255.254.0. This subnet allocates 512
IP addresses to the selected network. You can modify this subnet by selecting the default
subnet and clicking the [Modify] button.
Where the network was initially assigned a smaller subnet, you can add another subnet
when the IP address runs out. Click on [Add] button to assign a new subnet to the
selected network. (NOTE: A maximum number of thirty two network addresses and subnet
mask settings is possible)
** For example, network address 10.10.10.0 with subnet mask 255.255.255.192 was initially
assigned to the selected network. This means only 64 addresses are initially allocated. If
the number of NEs exceeds 62, a new subnet must be assigned to the network to allocate
new IP addresses for the new NEs.

- 9-

NWD-104045

NOTE: *The maximum number of NEs per CPMC network is 416 NEs regardless to whether
more than 416 IP addresses are assigned to the network.
* The maximum number of NEs per Root NE network is 500.
This number is calculated by following formula.
Maximum number of NEs per Root NE network
=[Maximum number of subnet per Root NE network] X [Maximum number of
NEs per subnet]
The ensuing window, Network Address window, allows you to modify the default subnet by
either changing the Network Address or the Subnet mask to be used by the selected
network. You can increase or decrease the allocated IP address on the selected network
by modifying the subnet mask and the network address in this window. (Refer to
Appendix B: Subnets to see the available subnets in the managed network.)
In the example shown below, where the network
address is 172.18.0.64 with subnet mask
255.255.255.192 given to the selected network,
NetCfgToolj will allocate the IP address
172.18.0.65-126 to this network. Note that in this
example 62 IP addresses were assigned. Another
as the network address (172.18.0.64) and
another as the broadcast address (172.18.0.127). Click on [OK] to save the new subnet.
When the [Add] button was clicked in step.3, the
ensuing window enables you to define another
subnet that will be added to the existing subnet.
Click on [Add] button to save the new subnet.
(NOTE: The maximum number of network
addresses and subnet mask settings that can be
registered is 5.)
NOTE: Since IP addresses from 172.17.240.0 thru 172.17.255.255 are internally reserved
IP Addresses, those can not be assigned to any network as its Network Address.
Click on [OK] button to save the new settings.
NOTE:

Network sizing rule

Maximum number of NE
Maximum number of CPMC/Root NE
Maximum number of subnet per CPMC
Maximum number of subnet per Root NE
Maximum number of NEs per subnet

Maximum number of branch (multi-drop) for


PASOLINK V3,PASOLINK V4,MIU

- 10-

5000NEs
500NEs
32 subnet
64 subnet
254 (Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0)
126 (Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.128)
62 (Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.192)
30 (Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.224)
14 (Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.240)
6
(Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.248)
2
(Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.252)
13

NWD-104045

Maximum number of branch (multi-drop) for


PASOLINK+,PASOLINK Mx,PASOLINK NEO,
PASOLINK NEO CPV,
PASOLINK NEO NODAL,
PASOLINK NEO NEO/a,
PASOLINK NEO HP,
PASOLINK NEO HP/A,
iPASOLINK 200,
iPASOLINK 400,
iPASOLINK 1000,
5000iPS,
5000S,
iPASOLINK EX,
iPASOLINK SX

- 11-

30

NWD-104045

2.9
2.9.1

Editing Workspace
Adding a New Network Element (NE)
+

The NetCfgToolj supports PASOLINK V3, PASOLINK V4, MIU, PASOLINK Mx, PASOLINK ,
+
+
PASOLINK Mx (Bridge NE), PASOLINK STM-1 (Bridge NE), PASOLINK PDH (Bridge NE),
PASOLINK NEO, PASOLINK NEO CPV, PASOLINK NEO NODAL, PASOLINK NEO/a,
PASOLINK NEO HP,PASOLINK NEO HP/A, iPASOLINK 200, iPASOLINK 400,
iPASOLINK1000, 5000iPS, 5000S, iPASOLINK EX and iPASOLINK SX network configurations.
Therefore a network element can either be a PASOLINK V3, PASOLINK V4, MIU, PASOLINK
+
+
+
Mx, PASOLINK , PASOLINK Mx (Bridge NE), PASOLINK STM-1 (Bridge NE), PASOLINK
PDH (Bridge NE), PASOLINK NEO, PASOLINK NEO CPV, PASOLINK NEO/a, PASOLINK NEO
HP, PASOLINK NEO HP/A, iPASOLINK 200, iPASOLINK 400, iPASOLINK 1000, 5000iPS,
5000S, iPASOLINK EX or iPASOLINK SX. Note that the configuration is the same for
+
PASOLINK V3 and PASOLINK V4 or PASOLINK Mx and PASOLINK .
To add a new NE:
1. Click on
icon in the tool bar or click on Edit Network Element Type from the
main menu to add a network element. Select the type of NE that you would like to add
from the pull-down list. PASOLINK V3 is selected by default.

2. Click on the spot in the current workspace where you wish to add the NE.
3. Arrange the newly added hop according to desired position in the workspace. The NEs
can be moved around the workspace by clicking on it and dragging it to the desired
location in the workspace.

- 12-

NWD-104045

2.9.2

Adding Back-to-back Line (cable)


To add a back-to-back line (cable):
1. Click on the

icon in the tool bar or click on Edit Add BB Line from the main menu.

2. Click on one of the NE to be connected. Then click on the other NE to be connected by


back-to-back line (cable) to the previously selected NE. Refer to the example given below.
Example: Connecting PASOLINK No.002 with PASOLINK No.008
Step 1. Click on

icon. Click on PASOLINK No. 002.

Step 2. Click on PASOLINK No. 008.


Step 3. Set the line properties.
(Refer to 2.9.32 Setting Line Properties.)
NOTE: Multi-drop or branch lines (B-B) cannot be
connected to the output or the NMS signal source -No.001 in
this example. PMC NMS port splits only the input signal but
not the output signal. This is a limitation of the PMC
hardware.

2.9.3

Adding DSC/SV Line (radio)


To add a DSC/SV line (radio):
1. Click on the
main menu.

icon in the tool bar or click on Edit Add DSC/SV Line from the

2. Click on one of the NE to be connected. Then click on the other NE to be connected by


DSC/SV line (radio) to the previously selected NE. Refer to the example given below.
Example: Connecting PASOLINK NEO (1NE) No.001 with
PASOLINK NEO (1NE) No.002

Step 1. Click on

icon. Click on PASOLINK NEO (1NE)

No. 001.
Step 2. Click on PASOLINK NEO (1NE) No. 002.

- 13-

NWD-104045

2.9.4

Back-to-Back Line Color Codes


The NMS back-to-back connection between NEs varies according to the type of NEs connected,
speed, synchronization, the port used and the type of protocol used. The NetCfgToolj uses
color-coded lines to allow the network designer to distinguish the various types of connection.

The following lists the color codes used by the NetCfgToolj to represent the different
back-to-back connection types.

Black: represents the common RS-485/RS-232C/9600bps/ASYNC multi-drop line


between PASOLINK, Line Concentrator and MIU NEs.

Red: represents the 64kbps/RS-422/SYNC connections between NE1 and NE1 of


+
+
PASOLINK Mx/PASOLINK /PASOLINK Mx (Bridge NE)/PASOLINK STM-1 (Bridge NE)
+
/PASOLINK PDH (Bridge NE) NEs.

Violet: represents the RS485/19200bps/ASYNC connections NE2 and NE1 of PASOLINK


+
Mx/PASOLINK NEs or RS485/9600bps/ASYNC connection between PASOLINK
V3/PASOLINK V4/MIU and PASOLINK NEO/PASOLINK NEO CPV/PASOLINK NEO
NODAL/PASOLINK NEO/a /PASOLINK NEO HP/PASOLINK NEO HP/A /iPASOLINK
+
200/iPASOLINK 400/iPASOLINK 1000/5000iPS/5000S/PASOLINK Mx/PASOLINK NEs
or RS485/19200bps/ASYNC connection between PASOLINK NEO/PASOLINK NEO
CPV/PASOLINK NEO NODAL/PASOLINK NEO/a /PASOLINK NEO HP/PASOLINK NEO
HP/A / iPASOLINK 200/iPASOLINK 400/iPASOLINK 1000/5000iPS/5000S/PASOLINK
+
Mx/PASOLINK and PASOLINK V3/PASOLINK V4/MIU NEs.

Blue: represents the LAN (Ethernet) back-to-back connection between PASOLINK


+
+
+
Mx/PASOLINK /PASOLINK Mx (Bridge NE)/PASOLINK STM-1 (Bridge NE) /PASOLINK
PDH (Bridge NE) /PASOLINK NEO/PASOLINK NEO CPV/PASOLINK NEO NODAL/
PASOLINK NEO/a /PASOLINK NEO HP/PASOLINK NEO HP/A /iPASOLINK 200/
iPASOLINK 400/iPASOLINK 1000/5000iPS/5000S/iPASOLINK EX/iPASOLINK SX NEs.

Green: represents the LAN(Ethernet) back-to-back connections between Inband and


Inband of iPASOLINK 200 /iPASOLINK 400 /iPASOLINK 1000 /5000iPS /iPASOLINK EX
/iPASOLINK SX NEs.

- 14-

NWD-104045

2.9.5

Deleting a Network Element (NE)


To remove an NE:

1. Click on the desired NE.


2. Right-click on the NE to display the context menu.
3. Click on Delete in the context menu to remove the NE.
4. Click [Yes] button.

2.9.6

Deleting a Line (cable)


To remove a line:

1. .Right click on the line to display the context menu.


2. Click on Line Delete in the context menu to continue removing the line.
3. Click [Yes] button.

- 15-

NWD-104045

2.9.7

Enabling NE Bridge NE mode


+

The PASOLINK Mx, PASOLINK STM-1, PASOLINK PDH NE can be Bridge NE mode enabled.
To enable Bridge NE mode:

1. In the main menu, select Network Switch to Bridge NE mode


NOTE: This changes all PASOLINK Mx, PASOLINK+ STM-1, and PASOLINK+ PDH that exist in
the workspace to NE for Bridge NE at once. Therefore, it is impossible to only enable
some NEs for Bridge NE mode.

NOTE: When any NE of PASOLINK Mx/


PASOLINK+ STM-1/PASOLINK+ PDH
do not exist in the workspace, the menu
cannot be selected.

- 16-

NWD-104045

Before

After

NOTE: The connection status of an NE automatically changes to blue (from violet) after it is
Bridge NE enabled.

- 17-

NWD-104045

2.9.8

Changing PASOLINK mode of NE (to NEO)


+

PASOLINK Mx (Bridge NE), PASOLINK STM-1 (Bridge NE), PASOLINK PDH (Bridge NE) NEs
can be changed to PASOLINK NEO. There are two ways in which this can be done.
Case 1: to change / enable via Main Menu
To change to PASOLINK NEO type NE:

1. Left-click (select) the NE to Bridge NE enable and change to PASOLINK NEO.


2. In the Main Menu, select Edit Switch to Network Element Type
PASOLINK NEO(Hop).
Case 2: to change / enable via Context Menu
To change to PASOLINK NEO type NE:

1. To display from the context menu, right-click the Bridge NE enabled NE.
2. To change to PASOLINK NEO type NE, select Switch to Network Element Type
PASOLINK NEO(Hop)in the context menu.

- 18-

NWD-104045

2.9.9

Setting or Modifying NE Properties of PASOLINK V3 and PASOLINK V4

2.9.9.1

To set or modify NE properties of PASOLINK V3 and PASOLINK V4:

1. Right click on the


selected NE to display
the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open
the NE Properties
window.)
2. Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NE Properties window.
3. By default, the NE Properties window opens with the General category view, which shows
the current configuration.
4. In this window, Equipment Type, NE Name, Area Name, Note, PMC Type, NE Name
Position, and Antenna Direction can be defined or modified. These parameters and their
definitions are listed in Table 2.1.

Table 2.1 General Parameters of PASOLINK V3 and PASOLINK V4


Parameter
Equipment Type
Network Element Name
Area Name
Note
PMC Type
Name Position
Antenna Direction

Definition
Specifies the type of equipment of the target NE. (PASOLINK V3
or PASOLINK V4)
Defines the name of the NE. Maximum number of characters
possible is 32.
Defines the name of the area where the NE is located. (Optional).
Maximum number of characters possible is 32.
Optional note used to describe the selected NE. Maximum
number of characters possible is 100.
Defines the role of the NE in the network. It can either be a CPM,
RPM or Sub-CPM.
Defines the position where the NE Name will be displayed in
relation to the NE bitmap in the workspace.
Defines the direction where the NE is facing in the workspace.

- 19-

NWD-104045

2.9.9.2

Editing Network Parameters of PASOLINK V3 and PASOLINK V4

To change the Network Parameters of PASOLINK V3 and PASOLINK V4:


1.

Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu. (Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)

2.

Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NE Properties window.

3.

The NE Properties window will appear. Click on Network category to display the
Network Parameters window.

4.

In the ensuing window, the IP Address for DPU Port, Opposite NE IP Address, IP
Address for NMS Port and Subnet Mask can be viewed. When "Assign IP Address
manually" check box or "Assign Subnet Mask manually" check box is selected, user
will be able to modify IP Addresses, Subnet Masks and Subnet Names of both DPU
and NMS ports. The definitions of these parameters are listed in Table 2.2.

a) CPMC Network

b) SCPMC Network

- 20-

NWD-104045

Table 2.2 Network Parameters of PASOLINK V3 and PASOLINK V4


Parameter
Assign IP Address manually
Assign Subnet Mask manually
DPU Port

NMS Port

IP Address
Subnet Mask

Subnet Name
Opposite Network
Element
IP Address
Subnet Mask

Subnet Name

Definition
By selecting this check box you can change the IP Address
the DPU and NMS ports.
By selecting this check box you can change Subnet Mask of
both DPU and NMS ports.
Defines the assigned IP Address of the selected NE.
Defines which part of the PMC IP Address will be masked and
defined as subnet. This also, defines what class of IP
addressing is used. (i.e. Class A, Class B, Class C, etc.). Only
3 subnet masks are allowed: 16 (255.255.255.240) default, 8
(255.255.255.248) or 4 (255.255.255.252).
Defines the name of the DPU Port sub-network.
Defines the IP Address of the opposite station.
Defines the assigned IP Address of the selected NE.
Defines which part of the PMC IP Address will be masked and
defined as subnet. This also, defines what class of IP
addressing is used. (i.e. Class A, Class B, Class C, etc.). Only
3 subnet masks are allowed: 16 (255.255.255.240) default, 8
(255.255.255.248) or 4 (255.255.255.252).
Defines the name of the NMS Port sub-network.

- 21-

NWD-104045

2.9.9.3

Editing HDLC Configuration Parameters of PASOLINK V3 and PASOLINK V4

To change the HDLC Configuration Parameters of PASOLINK V3 and PASOLINK V4:

1. Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu.


(Or double click on the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on HDLC category to display the HDLC
Configuration Parameters window.
4. In this window, the Master Timeout, Master Interval, Slave Timeout, Auto Roll Change,
Roll Change and High BER DPU Inhibit can be defined and changed. The definitions of
these parameters are listed in Table 2.3.

Table 2.3 HDLC Configuration Parameters of PASOLINK V3 and PASOLINK V4


Parameter
Master Timeout
Master Interval
Slave Timeout
UA Timeout
Auto Role Change

Role Change Timeout

High BER DPU Inhibit

Definition
The time in seconds after which the PMC will assume that it has lost
the communication link with the master PMC.
The interval in seconds at which the PMC will check for the polling
signal from the master PMC
The time in seconds after which the master PMC will assume that
the link with its slave PMC is lost.
The time period that the master PMC will wait for response for
SNRM.
If enabled, the PMC will automatically change its function from slave
to master PMC, once it has lost its link with the master PMC in the
upper network. It will also automatically change back to slave once
the link with the master is restored. This is normally set to
"Enable".
The elapsed time in seconds that the slave PM card waits for the
polling message from the CPMC before it assumes the role of the
CPMC.
If High BER DPU Inhibit is set to Enable, Hi BER alarm is inhibited.
Then it will not be activated even if DPU port receives deficient data.

- 22-

NWD-104045

2.9.9.4

Editing Port Configuration Parameters of PASOLINK V3 and PASOLINK V4

To change the Port Configuration Parameters of PASOLINK V3 and PASOLINK V4:


1. Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on Port category to display the Port
Configuration Parameters window.
4. The DPU Port and NMS Port baud rates can be changed via this window. The definitions
of these parameters are listed in Table 2.4.

Table 2.4 Port Configuration Parameters of PASOLINK V3 and PASOLINK V4


Parameter
DPU Port

Action Mode

NMS Port

Baud Rate
Action Mode
Baud Rate
Mode

Definition
Defines the role of the DPU Port of NE. * The possible modes
are Master, Slave, and Repeater.
Defines the speed of the DPU Port in bits-per-second (bps).
Defines the role of the NMS Port of NE. * The possible modes
are Master, Slave, Repeater and Disabled.
Defines the speed of the NMS Port in bits-per-second (bps).
Defines the wiring (interface) protocol used

* This item will not be defined until the Create Configuration process.

- 23-

NWD-104045

2.9.9.5

Editing Other Parameters of PASOLINK V3 and PASOLINK V4

To change the Other Parameters of PASOLINK V3 and PASOLINK V4:


1. Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on Other category to display the Other
Parameters window.
4. In this window, the Auto Set Time, Set Time Interval, Auto Write Back, and Write Back
Interval can be changed. The definitions of these parameters are listed in Table 2.5.

Table 2.5 Other Parameters of PASOLINK V3, PASOLINK V4


Parameter
Auto Set Time
Set Time Interval
Auto Write Back
Write Back Interval

Definition
If enabled, the PMC automatically sets its time to match that of the
PNMS or the CPMC.
The time interval before the PMC periodically synchronizes its time
to the PNMS or CPMC.
If enabled, the PMC automatically writes the Log data and PM data
to the Flash ROM.
The time interval at which the PMC saves Log and PM data in the
Flash ROM.

- 24-

NWD-104045

2.9.9.6

Editing PNMS Parameters (for CPMC only) of PASOLINK V3 and PASOLINK V4

This parameter is relevant only to the NE designated as CPMC.


To change the PNMS Parameters of PASOLINK V3 and PASOLINK V4:
1. Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on PNMS category to display the PNMS
Parameters window.

4. In this window, the IP address and subnet mask information of the PNMS port are
defined. LAN or RS232/RS422 is selected as the connection mode and the
corresponding parameters in the ensuing box are activated. These parameters are
defined in Table 2.6.

- 25-

NWD-104045

Table 2.6 PNMS Parameters of PASOLINK V3 and PASOLINK V4


Parameter
PNMS Connection

LAN

IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway

RS232C/RS422

Connection Type

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Definition
Defines the type of connection used by the CPMC to the
PNMS. The CPMC can connect to the PNMS PC /
Workstation either thru RS232C/RS422 (Dial-Up) or LAN (IP)
connection.
PASOLINK V3, PASOLINK V4: RS232C/RS422/LAN
IP address of LAN port of the target NE.
Subnet mask of LAN port mentioned above.
IP address of Default Gateway.
Normally the IP address of the PNMS PC.
Defines the type of connection used by the CPMC to the
PNMS. The CPMC can connect to the PNMS PC either thru
Direct connection (Dial-Up) or Router connection.
When the RS232C or RS422 PNMS connection is selected,
the input fields are activated. The IP address is the one that is
used by the RS232C or RS422 port of the PASOLINK IDU.
Subnet Mask of the RS232C or RS422 port mentioned above.

- 26-

NWD-104045

2.9.10 Setting Properties of MIU (Line Concentrator)


A Line Concentrator is a Stand-alone MIU that is used as a CPMC to poll other NEs in its
sub-network.
To modify the properties of MIU (Line Concentrator):

1.

Right click on the


selected MIU (Line
Concentrator) to display
the context menu. (Or
double click on the selected MIU to open the Properties window of the selected Line
Concentrator.)

2.

Click on Properties in the context menu to open the Properties window of the selected Line
Concentrator.

3.

The Properties window of the Line Concentrator contains the parameters shown and
defined in Table 2.7.

4.

Click on [OK] button after completing the Line concentrator properties setup.

- 27-

NWD-104045

Table 2.7 Properties of MIU (Line Concentrator)


Parameter
System

Equipment
Redundancy
Total PMC

Symbol

Type
Repeater Type
Bit Rate ID
FASYNC Alarm
Active
Name

Name Position
Line Direction
MIU

CPMC Normal

Definition
In Line Concentrator this field will display Line Concentrator
and will not be selectable (appears gray).
Not Applicable.
The total number of PMCs needed to monitor the selected
equipment.
NOTE: In case of Line concentrator, ONLY 1 PMC is possible.
DO NOT set the Total PMC to a value greater than 1.
Not Applicable.
Not Applicable.
Not Applicable.
Not Applicable.
The name that will be associated with the selected Line
concentrator symbol. Maximum number of characters
possible is 29.
NOTE: This is the primary name NE in the workspace. This
name will NOT be associated to the configuration file for this
NE. To set the name for the configuration file see section
2.9.10.1) Setting NE Properties of MIU (Line Concentrator),
Table 2.8)
The position where the name of the selected Line
concentrator will be displayed.
Defines on which side the NMS line will be added to the Line
concentrator.
This button contains the NE properties of the Line
concentrator. This contains the network, HDLC, port and
other parameters connected to the NMS setting of the MIU.
(See Appendix A: MIU Setting)

- 28-

NWD-104045

2.9.10.1 Setting NE Properties of MIU (Line Concentrator)


1) To set or edit General Parameters of MIU (Line Concentrator)
To set/change the General Configuration Parameters of MIU (Line Concentrator):
1. Right click on the
selected Line
Concentrator to display
the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected MIU to open
the Properties
window.)
2. Click on Properties
from the context menu
to open the Properties
window of Line
Concentrator.
3. Click on [CPMC
Normal] button on the
Properties window.
4. The NE Properties
window will appear. The
default is the General category window, which shows the current configuration. The
[Cancel] button will close the window without saving the changes.
5. In this window, the NE Name, Area Name, Note, Equipment Type and A/D Convert Type
can be changed. The definitions of these parameters are listed in Table 2.8.
Table 2.8 General Parameters for MIU (Line Concentrator)
Parameter
System

NetworkElement
Name
Area Name
Note
PMC Usage
Equipment Type
Performance
Monitor Input
A/D Convert Type

PMC Type

Definition
The name that will be associated with the target NE. This
name will be applied in the configuration files. Maximum
number of characters possible is 32.
The area where the NE is located (optional). Maximum
number of characters possible is 32.
Additional description of the NE (optional). Maximum number
of characters possible is 100.
Not Available
Displayed as Line Concentrator (not selectable).
Not Available.
The number of Analog-to-Digital conversions used in the MIU.
The MIU is capable of processing a maximum of two (2) A/D
conversions.
Set as CPMC for line concentrators cannot be modified.

2) Editing Network Parameters of MIU (Line Concentrator)


(Refer to 2.9.9.2 Editing Network Parameters of PASOLINK V3 and PASOLINK V4.)

- 29-

NWD-104045

3) Editing HDLC Parameters of MIU (Line Concentrator)


To change the HDLC configuration parameters:
1. Right click on the selected
Line concentrator to display
the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected MIU to open the
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the
Properties window.
3. Click on [CPMC Normal]
button on the Properties
window.
4. The NE Properties window
will appear. Select HDLC
category in the NE
Properties window.
5. The HDLC parameters window contains the parameters concerning the HDLC settings of
the target Line Concentrator. Note that the HDLC default values are the optimum
(recommended) settings. The definition of the HDLC parameters is shown in Table 2.9.
Table 2.9 HDLC Parameters for MIU (Line Concentrator)
Parameter
HDLC Timer

Master Timeout

Master Interval
Slave Timeout
Role Change

Auto Role Change

Role Change Timeout

HDLC Relay

High BER DPU Inhibit

Definition
The time in seconds after which the PMC will assume
that it has lost the communication link with the master
PMC.
The interval in seconds at which the PMC will check for
the polling signal from the master PMC.
The time in seconds after which the master PMC will
assume that the link with its slave PMC is lost.
If enabled, the PMC will automatically change its
function from slave to master PMC, once it has lost its
link with the master PMC in the upper network. It will
also automatically change back to slave once the link
with the master is restored. This is normally set to
"Enable".
The elapsed time in seconds that the slave PM card
waits for the polling message from the CPMC before it
changes over to assume the role of the CPMC.
If High BER DPU Inhibit is set to Enable, Hi BER alarm
is inhibited. This means that it will not be activated even
if the DPU port receives deficient data.

- 30-

NWD-104045

4) Editing Port Parameters of MIU (Line Concentrator)


To change the Port configuration parameters:
1. Right click on the selected
Line Concentrator to
display the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected MIU to open the
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the
Properties window.
3. Click on [CPMC Normal]
button on the Properties
window.
4. The MIUs NE Properties
window will appear.
5. Select the Port category.
The Port category window contains the parameters defining the port settings of the target
Line Concentrator. The definition of the Port parameters is shown in Table 2.10.
Table 2.10 Port Parameters for MIU (Line Concentrator)
Parameters
DPU Port*

Action Mode

NMS Port

Baud Rate
Mode
Action Mode
Baud Rate
Mode Auto Assign
Mode
Terminal Auto Assign

Terminate

Definition
Defines the role of the DPU Port of MIU.
Disabled for Line Concentrator.
Not applicable.
Not applicable.
Defines the role of the NMS Port of MIU.
Set to Master for Line concentrators.
Defines the speed of the NMS Port in bits-per-second
(bps).
If Mode Auto Assign is set to Manual, the mode on the
NMS port can be set to RS485_TX or RS485_RX.
Defines the wiring (interface) protocol used.
Automatically allow the NetCfgToolj to terminate the
HDLC connection of the selected NEs NMS port, if it is
the last port in the HDLC line. (Recommended)
If Terminal Auto Assign is set to Manual, the termination
on the NMS port can be set to Enable or Disable.
Terminates the RS485 protocol line when enabled.

- 31-

NWD-104045

5) Other Parameters for MIU (Line Concentrator)


To change the Other Parameters for MIU (Line Concentrator):
1. Right click on the selected
Line Concentrator to display
the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected MIU to open the
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the
MIU Properties window.
3. Click on [CPMC Normal]
button of the Properties
window.
4. The Line Concentrators NE
Properties window will
appear.
5. Select the Other category. The Other category window contains the parameters defining
the Time and Flash ROM settings of the target Line Concentrator. The definition of the
Other parameters is shown in Table 2.11.
Table 2.11 Other Parameters for MIU (Line Concentrator)
Parameter
Set Time

Auto Set Time


Set Time Interval

Flash ROM

Auto Write Back


Write Back Interval

Definition
If enabled, the PMC automatically synchronizes its time to
that of the PNMS or the CPMC.
The time interval before the PMC periodically
synchronizes its time to that of the PNMS or CPMC.
If enabled, the PMC automatically writes the Log data and
PM data to the Flash ROM.
The time interval before the PMC writes the Log data and
PM data to the Flash ROM.

- 32-

NWD-104045

6) Editing PNMS Parameters of MIU (Line Concentrator)


To change the PNMS configuration parameters of MIU (Line Concentrator):
1. Right click on the selected MIU to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected MIU to open the Properties window.)
2. Click on [CPMC Normal] button in the Properties window.
3. The Line Concentrators NE Properties window will appear. The default is the General
category window, which shows the current configuration.
4. Select the PNMS category window, which contains the parameters defining the PNMS
connection type, IP address, subnet mask, default gateway and other network parameters of
the Line concentrator. When LAN or RS232/RS422 connections are selected, the
corresponding parameters in the ensuing box are activated. Table 2.12 shows PNMS port
parameters.

- 33-

NWD-104045

Table 2.12 PNMS Parameters for MIU (Line Concentrator)


Parameter
PNMS Connection

LAN*

IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default
Gateway

RS232C/RS422

Connection
Type

IP Address
Subnet Mask

Definition
Defines the type of connection that the PMC in the Line
concentrator has the PNMS. There are three (3) possible
PNMS connections allowed by the PMC namely:
RS-232C: PNMS connects to the PMC using
RS-232C/19.2kbps Asynchronous interface.
RS-422: PNMS connects to the PMC using
RS422/19.2kbps/V.11 Asynchronous Interface
LAN: PMC connects directly to an Ethernet network using
10BaseT/10Mbps interface.
Defines the IP address that will be assigned to the
LAN-PNMS port of the PMC.
Defines the subnet mask used by the LAN port of the PMC.
Defines the IP address of the machine where the traps from
the PMC will be forwarded.
In cases where the PNMS PC/WS is in the same network
(LAN) as the PMC, this will normally be the IP address of the
PNMS PC/WS.
In case of WAN or networks wherein the PNMS is located in
another network, this will be the IP address of the nearest
router.
Specifies whether the RS232C/RS422 connection is Direct or
through Router.
Direct - connection means the PNMS PC connects to the
CPMC using its local COM ports.
Router means that the CPMC is connected to the PNMS
through a router. In this case the IP address must be in the
same subnet as the routers serial port.
Defines the IP address that will be assigned to the PNMS port
of the PMC.
Defines the subnet mask used by the PNMS port of the PMC.

*Option only available if the PMC used in the Line Concentrator supports LAN connection.

- 34-

NWD-104045

2.9.11 Setting Properties of MIU (Hop)


This is a type of MIU that is equipped with microwave radio and can be used as CPMC, SCPMC
or RPMC. To modify MIU (Hop) properties:

1. Right click on the selected


MIU (Hop) to display the
context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected MIU to open the
Properties window of the selected MIU.)
2. Click on Properties in the context menu to open the Properties window of the selected MIU
(Hop).
3. The Properties window of the MIU contains the parameters shown and defined in Table
2.13.
4. Click on [OK] button after completing the MIU properties setup.

- 35-

NWD-104045

Table 2.13 Properties of MIU (Hop)


Parameter
System Equipment

Redundancy
Total PMC
Type

Repeater Type

Bit Rate ID

FASYNC Alarm Active

Symbol

Name

Name Position

MIU

Line Direction
PMC Button
[CMPC/SCPCM/RPMC
Normal/Additional/etc]

Definition
Specifies the type of equipment monitored by the MIU. They
are 2000S or 2300S or 2500S or 2600S or 3000S or 3500S or
Other equipment.
The redundancy of the selected equipment. (1+0, 1+ 1, or
N+1 system.)
The total number of PMCs needed to monitor the selected
equipment.
When the selected equipment is 2000S or 2500S or 2600S,
the termination type is specified in this parameter. The
equipment type specified above can either be Repeater or
Terminal type.
The repeater type specifies the mode of repeating the signal
at the 2600S radio. The 2600S can function as either a
Drop-In or Through repeater. This is only available for
2600S radio with the repeater function enabled. (See also
Type.)
This parameter specifies the bit rate of the 2500S radio
(32MB, 8x2MB or 4x2MB). When Other Equipment is
selected the bit rate selection is (34MB, 17MB, or 8MB). This
parameter is not available for other equipment types. This
data is used for the Block Error Counter (BEC) of the
Performance Monitor function.
Specifies when the FASYNC alarm is active for the selected
equipment. (Low Active or High Active) This data is used in
UAS measurement of the Performance Monitor.
The primary name that will be associated with the target
MIUs symbol in the workspace. This name will be the one
displayed in the NetCfgToolj workspace and will NOT be
associated with the configuration files. Maximum possible
number of characters is 29.
To set the NE name for the configuration files, please go to
section 2.9.11.1) Setting NE Properties of MIU (Hop), Table
2.14) and set the PMCs individually if more than one PMC is
installed in the target MIU.
The position where the name of the target MIU will be
displayed.
Defines which side the NMS line will be added to the MIU.
This button contains the NE properties of the MIU. This
contains the network, HDLC, port and other parameters
connected to the NMS setting of the MIU. It also describes the
PMC type (CPMC, SCPMC, or RPMC) and the PMC Usage
(Normal, Additional PC, Regular CH, or Protection CH). (See
Appendix A: MIU Setting)

- 36-

NWD-104045

2.9.11.1 Setting NE Properties of MIU (Hop)


1) Setting/editing the General Parameters of MIU (Hop)
To change the General Configuration Parameters of MIU (Hop):
1. Right click on the selected MIU to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected MIU to open the Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the context menu to open the MIU Properties window.
3. Click on [CPMC (or SCPMC or RPMC) Normal] button in the Properties window.
4. The MIUs NE Properties window will appear. The default is the General category
window, which shows the current configuration. Click on [OK] button to save changes and
close the window. [Cancel] button will close the window without saving the changes.
5. In this window, the NE Name, Area Name, Note, Equipment Type, Performance
Monitoring, A/D Convert Type and PMC Type can be changed. The definitions of these
parameters are listed in Table 2.14.

- 37-

NWD-104045

Table 2.14 General Parameters of MIU (Hop)


Parameter
System
NetworkElement
Name
Area Name
Note
PMC Usage

Equipment Type
Performance
Monitor Input
A/D Convert Type

PMC Type

Definition
The name that will be assigned to the target NE. This name
will be applied in the configuration files. Maximum number of
characters possible is 32.
The area where the NE is located (optional). Maximum
number of characters possible is 32.
Additional description of the NE (optional). Maximum number
of characters possible is 100.
If the selected MIU contains more than one PMC, the
following PMC usage will apply:
1. ) For 1+0/1+1/Line Concentrator/Other Equipment system:
a.) 1st PMC is used as Normal. b.) and the other PMC's are
used as Additional PMCs.
2.) For N+1 system: a) 1st PMC is used as Protection CH. b.)
and the other PMC's are used as Regular CH or Additional
PMC.
The type of equipment monitored by the target MIU.
The number of MIU channels used for performance
monitoring functions. The MIU can accommodate up to 2 CH
for performance monitoring purposes.
The number of Analog-to-Digital conversions used in the MIU.
The MIU is capable of processing a maximum of two (2) A/D
conversions.
The role of the PMC in the target MIU NE in the HDLC chain.

2) Editing Network Parameters of MIU (Hop)


(Refer to 2.9.9.2 Editing Network Parameters of PASOLINK V3 and PASOLINK V4.)

- 38-

NWD-104045

3) Editing HDLC Parameters of MIU (Hop)


To change the HDLC configuration parameters of MIU (Hop):
1. Right click on the selected
MIU to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected MIU to open the
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the
MIU Properties window.
3. Click on [CPMC (or
SCPMC or RPMC)
Normal] button in the
Properties window.
4. The MIUs NE Properties
window will appear.
5. Select the HDLC category. The HDLC category window contains the parameters
concerning the HDLC settings of the target MIU. Note that the HDLC default values are
the optimum (recommended) settings. The definition of the HDLC parameters is shown in
Table 2.15.
Table 2.15 HDLC Parameters of MIU (Hop)
Parameters
HDLC Timer

Master
Timeout
Master Interval
Slave Timeout

Role Change

Auto Role
Change

Role Change
Timeout
HDLC Relay

High BER DPU


Inhibit

Definition
The time in seconds wherein the PMC will assume that it has
lost communication link with the master PMC.
The time in seconds where in the PMC will check for the
polling signal from the master PMC.
The time in seconds wherein the master PMC will assume
that the link with its slave PMC is lost.
If enabled, the PMC will automatically change its function from
slave to master PMC, once it has lost its link with the master
PMC in the upper network. It will also automatically change
back to slave once the link with the master is restored. This
is normally set to "Enable".
The elapsed time in seconds that the slave PM card waits for
the polling message from the CPMC before it adopts the
function of the CPMC.
If High BER DPU Inhibit is set to Enable, Hi BER alarm is
inhibited. This means that it will not be activated even if the
DPU port receives degraded data.

- 39-

NWD-104045

4) Editing Port Parameters of MIU (Hop)


To change the Port configuration parameters of MIU (Hop):
1. Right click on the selected
MIU to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected MIU to open the
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the
MIU Properties window.
3. Click on [CPMC (or
SCPMC or RPMC)
Normal] button in the
Properties window.
4. The MIUs NE Properties
window will appear.
5. Select the Port category. The Port category window contains the parameters defining the
port settings of the target MIU. The definition of the Port parameters is shown in Table
2.16.
Table 2.16 Port Parameters of MIU (Hop)
Parameters
DPU Port

NMS Port

Action Mode
Baud Rate
Mode
Action Mode
Baud Rate
Mode Auto
Assign
Mode
Terminal Auto
Assign
Terminate

Definition
Defines the role of the DPU Port of MIU.
Defines the speed of the DPU Port in bits-per-second (bps).
Defines the protocol used in the DPU port. RS-422/RS232
and G.703 can be used in the MIUs DPU port.
Defines the role of the NMS Port of MIU.
Defines the speed of the NMS Port in bits-per-second (bps).
If Mode Auto Assign is set to Manual, the mode on the NMS
port can be set to RS485_TX or RS485_RX.
Defines the wiring (interface) protocol used.
Automatically allow the NetCfgToolj to terminate the HDLC
connection of the selected NEs NMS port, if it is the last port
in the HDLC line. (Recommended)
If Terminal Auto Assign is set to Manual, the termination on
the NMS port can be set to Enable or Disable.
Terminates the RS485 protocol line when enabled.

- 40-

NWD-104045

5) Editing Other Parameters of MIU (Hop)


To change the Other parameters of MIU (Hop):
1. Right click on the selected
MIU to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected MIU to open the
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the
MIU Properties window.
3. Click on [CMPC/RPMC
Normal] button on the
Properties window.
4. The MIUs NE Properties
window will appear.
5. Select the Other category.
The Other category window contains the parameters defining the Time and Flash ROM
settings of the target MIU. The definition of the other parameters is shown in Table 2.17.
Table 2.17 Other Parameters of MIU (Hop)
Parameter
Set Time

Definition
Auto Set Time
Set Time Interval

Flash ROM

Auto Write Back


Write Back Interval

If enabled, the PMC automatically sets it time to match that of


the PNMS or the CPMC.
The time interval before the PMC periodically synchronizes its
time to the PNMS or CMPMC.
If enabled, the PMC automatically writes the Log data and PM
data to the Flash ROM.
The time interval before the PMC writes the Log data and PM
data to the Flash ROM.

- 41-

NWD-104045

6) Editing PNMS Parameters of MIU (Hop)


To change the PNMS configuration parameters of MIU (Hop):
1. Right click on the selected MIU to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected MIU to open the Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the context menu to open the MIU Properties window.
3. Click on [CPMC (or SCPMC or RPMC) Normal] button on the Properties window.
4. The MIUs NE Properties window will appear. The default is the General category window,
which shows the current configuration.
5. Select the PNMS category. The PNMS category window contains the parameters defining
the PNMS connection type, IP address, subnet mask, default gateway and other network
parameters of the Line concentrator. As connection LAN or RS232/RS422 is selected, the
corresponding parameters in the ensuing box are applied. The definition of the PNMS port
parameters is shown in Table 2.18.

- 42-

NWD-104045

Table 2.18 PNMS Parameters of MIU (Hop)


Parameter
PNMS Connection

LAN*

IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default
Gateway

RS232C/RS422

Connection
Type

IP Address
Subnet Mask

Definition
Defines the type of connection that the PMC in the Line
concentrator has with the PNMS. There are three (3) possible
PNMS connections allowed by the PMC namely:
RS-232C: PNMS connects to the PMC using
RS-232C/19.2kbps Asynchronous interface.
RS-422: PNMS connects to the PMC using
RS422/19.2kbps/V.11 Asynchronous Interface.
LAN: PMC connects directly to an Ethernet network using
10BaseT/10Mbps interface.
Defines the IP address that will be assigned to the
LAN-PNMS port of the PMC.
Defines the subnet mask used by the LAN port of the PMC.
Defines the IP address of the machine where the traps from
the PMC will be forwarded.
In cases where the PNMS PC/WS is in the same network
(LAN) as the PMC, this will be normally the IP address of the
PNMS PC/WS.
In case of WAN or networks wherein the PNMS is located in
another network, this will be the IP address of the nearest
router.
Specifies whether the RS232C/RS422 connection is Direct or
through Router.
Direct connection means the PNMS PC connects to the
CPMC using its local COM ports.
Router means that the CPMC is connected to the PNMS
through a router. In this case the IP address must be in the
same subnet as the routers serial port.
Defines the IP address that will be assigned to the PNMS port
of the PMC.
Defines the subnet mask used by the PNMS port of the PMC.

*Option only available if the PMC used in the MIU supports LAN connection.

- 43-

NWD-104045
+

2.9.12 Setting NE Properties of PASOLINK Mx and PASOLINK

2.9.12.1 To set or modify the NE properties of PASOLINK Mx/PASOLINK :

1. Right click on the


selected NE to display
the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will be displayed as shown below. The default view is the
General category window, which shows the current configuration.
4. In this window, NE Name, Area Name, Note, CTRL Type, NE Name Position, and Antenna
Direction can be changed. These parameters are defined in Table 2.19.

Table 2.19 General Parameters of PASOLINK Mx and PASOLINK


Parameter
System

Equipment Type
Network Element
Name
Area Name
Note

CTRL Type

CTRL Type

Position/
Direction

Name Position
Antenna
Direction

Port Information

Definition
The type of equipment: PASOLINK Mx, PASOLINK+ STM-1
and PDH.
The name of the NE in the network. Maximum number of
characters possible is 32.
The area where the NE is located (optional). Maximum
number of characters possible is 32.
Additional description, or remark on the NE (optional).
Maximum number of characters possible is 100.
Role of the CTRL in the network. Root NE, Branch NE or
Normal NE.
The position of the text in the workspace can be customized
here.
The antenna icon in the workspace can be customized to face
either Right or Left.
This provides the IP information of the available port in the
selected NE. The IP address that the port uses and its subnet
mask can be viewed in this section.

- 44-

NWD-104045
+

2.9.12.2 Editing Radio/NE1 Parameters of PASOLINK Mx and PASOLINK

To change the Radio/NE1 Parameters of PASOLINK Mx and PASOLINK :


1. Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the Radio/NE1 category to display the
Radio/NE1 port information.
a) Root NE / Normal NE

b) Branch NE

4. In this window, the IP Address information of the Radio/NE1 port is defined. If the CTRL
Type from the General category is set to Root NE or Normal NE, the IP address under
Bridge is used. On the other hand, if set to Branch NE, the IP addresses under
Separate Interface are used. The definitions of these parameters are listed in Table 2.20.
NOTE: The IP addresses, Subnet Masks can only be manually set if selected in Assign IP
Address manually check box or Assign Subnet Mask manually check box.

- 45-

NWD-104045

Table 2.20 Radio/NE1 Parameters of PASOLINK Mx and PASOLINK


Parameter
Assign IP Address manually
Assign Subnet Mask manually
Network

Port Setting

Bridge IP Address
Bridge Subnet Mask
Bridge Subnet Name
IP Address for Radio
Subnet Mask for Radio
Subnet Name for Radio
IP Address for NE1
Subnet Mask for NE1
Subnet Name for NE1
Radio /Speed
Radio /Opposite IP
Address
NE1 /Speed
NE1 /Mode

Definition
When Assign IP Address manually check box is
selected, user can modify IP Address (Radio/NE1).
When Assign Subnet Mask manually check box is
selected, user can modify Subnet Mask (Radio/NE1).
IP address of the Bridge or LAN port of the selected NE.
Subnet mask of the LAN port.
Defines the name of the Bridge Port sub-network.
IP address of the DPU/Radio port.
Subnet mask of the DPU/Radio port.
Defines the name of the Radio port sub-network.
IP address of NE1 port.
Subnet mask of NE1 port.
Defines the name of the NE1 port sub-network.
Speed of the DPU port of the selected NE.
IP address of the opposite NE (DPU port).
Speed of the NE1 port of the target NE.
The HDLC mode of NE1 port. Enabled only when NE1
(64000 bps is used). The possible modes are Master,
Slave and Disabled.

- 46-

NWD-104045
+

2.9.12.3 Editing NE2 Parameters of PASOLINK Mx and PASOLINK

To change the NE2 Parameters for PASOLINK Mx and PASOLINK :


1. Right click on the
selected NE to display
the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the
NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in
the context menu to
open the NE Properties
window.
3. The NE Properties
window will appear.
Click on the NE2
category to display the
NE2 port information.
4. In this window, the IP
Address of the NE2 port
is defined. The
definitions of these
parameters are listed in
Table 2.21.

Table 2.21 NE2 Parameters of PASOLINK Mx and PASOLINK


Parameter
Common

Data Link

HDLC

IP Address
Subnet Mask
Speed
Mode
Terminal Auto
Assign
Terminate

Definition
Type of data link protocol used by NE2. This is always set at
HDLC when connected in multi-drop with another NE. The
data link will be set to PPP when connected to a PASOLINK
V3/PASOLINK V4/MIU CPMC.
IP address of NE2.
Subnet mask of NE2 port.
Speed of NE2 port.
Specifies if the NE2 port is used in HDLC. The NE2 port can
either be Master, Slave or blank.
Automatically allow the NetCfgToolj to terminate the HDLC
connection of the selected NEs NE2 port, if it is the last port in
the HDLC line. (Recommended)
If Terminal Auto Assign is set to Manual, the NE2 port
termination can be set to On or Off.

- 47-

NWD-104045
+

2.9.12.4 Editing LAN (B-B) Parameters of PASOLINK Mx and PASOLINK

To change the LAN (B-B) Parameters of PASOLINK Mx and PASOLINK :


1. Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the LAN (B-B) category to display the
LAN (B-B) parameters.
4. The IP address and Subnet Mask of the LAN port are defined in this window. It is shown
only if the back to back connection is set to LAN.

- 48-

NWD-104045
+

2.9.12.5 Editing PNMS Parameters (for Root NE only) of PASOLINK Mx and PASOLINK
This parameter is relevant only to NE designated as Root NE.
To change the PNMS Parameters:
1. Right click on the selected
NE to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the
NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the
NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties
window will appear. Click
on the PNMS category to
display the PNMS
parameters.
4. In this window, the IP
Address and subnet
mask information of the
PNMS port are defined.
The definitions of these
parameters are listed in Table 2.22.

Table 2.22 PNMS Parameters of PASOLINK Mx and PASOLINK


Parameter
PNMS Connection

LAN

IP Address

V.11 (Default)

Subnet Mask
IP Address

Subnet Mask
Speed

Definition
Defines the type of connection to the PNMS used by the Root
NE. The Root NE can connect to the PNMS PC either thru
V.11 (Dial-UP) connection or LAN (IP) connection.
When the Ethernet connection is selected, the LAN input
fields are activated. The IP address defines that it is used by
the IDU LAN port. However, it is only used when the LAN port
is used for connecting the PNMS.
IP address of LAN port of the NE. This is only set if the
selected NE is a Root NE.
Subnet mask of abovementioned LAN port.
When Dial-Up connection is selected, the V.11 input fields are
activated. The IP address defines that it is used by the V.11
port of the IDU. Note that is only used when the V.11 port is
used for PNMS connection.
Subnet Mask of the V.11 port mentioned above.
Connection speed for dial-up access.

- 49-

NWD-104045
+

2.9.12.6 Editing Routing Parameters of PASOLINK Mx and PASOLINK

To change the Routing Parameters of PASOLINK Mx and PASOLINK :


1. Right click on the selected
NE to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the
NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to
open the NE Properties
window.
3. The NE Properties window
will appear. Click on the
Routing category to
display the routing
parameters.
4. The IP address of the
Default Gateway can be set
via this window. The
Default Gateway IP
address is normally the IP
address of the PNMS PC /
Workstation or the router
associated with the PNMS.

- 50-

NWD-104045
+

2.9.12.7 Editing SNTP Parameters of PASOLINK Mx and PASOLINK

Each NE support Simple Network Time Protocol, used to synchronize its internal clock to a
defined Time-server in the network.
+

To change the SNTP Parameters for PASOLINK Mx and PASOLINK :


1. Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the SNTP category to display the SNTP
parameters.
4. The Time Synchronization mode can be set in this window. The time on the CTRL
module can either be synchronized to a time-server with SNTP in the network or set to
None (no time synchronization). The IP address of the time-server as well as the Refresh
Interval- (the time in seconds that elapses before the NE will try to synchronize its internal
clock to a specified time-server) can be set in this window.

a) Root NE

b) Other

- 51-

NWD-104045
+

2.9.13 Setting NE Properties of PASOLINK Mx (Bridge NE), PASOLINK STM-1 (Bridge NE) and
+
PASOLINK PDH (Bridge NE)
+

2.9.13.1 To set or modify the NE properties of PASOLINK Mx (Bridge NE), PASOLINK STM-1
+
(Bridge NE) and PASOLINK PDH (Bridge NE):

1. Right click on the


selected NE to display
the context menu. (Or
double click on the
selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will be displayed as shown below. The default view is the
General category window, which shows the current configuration.
4. In this window, NE Name, Area Name, Note, CTRL Type, NE Name Position, and
Antenna Direction can be changed. These parameters are defined in Table 2.23.
Table 2.23 General Parameters of PASOLINK Mx (Bridge NE),
+
+
PASOLINK STM-1 (Bridge NE) and PASOLINK PDH (Bridge NE)
Parameter
System

Equipment Type

Network Element
Name
Area Name
Note
CTRL Type

CTRL Type

Position/
Direction

Name Position
Antenna
Direction

Port Information

Definition
The type of equipment: PASOLINK Mx (Bridge NE),
+
+
PASOLINK STM-1 (Bridge NE) and PASOLINK PDH
(Bridge NE).
The name of the NE in the network. Maximum number of
characters possible is 32.
The area where the NE is located (optional). Maximum
number of characters possible is 32.
Additional description, or remark on the NE (optional).
Maximum number of characters possible is 100.
Role of the CTRL in the network. Root NE, Root NE (Bridge),
Branch NE or Normal NE.
The position of the text in the workspace can be customized
here.
The antenna icon in the workspace can be customized to face
either Right or Left.
This provides the IP information of the available port in the
selected NE. The IP address that the port uses and its subnet
mask can be viewed in this section.

- 52-

NWD-104045
+

2.9.13.2 Editing Radio/NE1 Parameters of PASOLINK Mx (Bridge NE), PASOLINK STM-1 (Bridge
+
NE) and PASOLINK PDH (Bridge NE)
To change the Radio/NE1/LAN Parameters:
1. Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the Radio/NE1/LAN category to display
the Radio/NE1/LAN port information.
a) Branch NE

b) Other

4. In this window, the IP Address information of the Radio/NE1/LAN port is defined. The
definitions of these parameters are listed in Table 2.24.
NOTE: The IP addresses, Subnet Masks can only be manually set if selected in Assign IP
Address manually check box or Assign Subnet Mask manually check box.

- 53-

NWD-104045

Table 2.24 Radio/NE1/LAN Parameters of PASOLINK Mx (Bridge NE),


+
+
PASOLINK STM-1 (Bridge NE) and PASOLINK PDH (Bridge NE)
Parameter
Assign IP Address manually
Assign Subnet Mask manually
Network

Port Setting

IP Address
Subnet Mask
Subnet Name
Radio /Speed
Radio /Opposite IP
Address
NE1 /Speed
NE1 /Mode

Definition
When Assign IP Address manually check box is selected,
user can modify IP Address (Radio/NE1/LAN).
When Assign Subnet Mask manually check box is
selected, user can modify Subnet Mask (Radio/NE1/LAN).
IP address of the respective port.
Subnet mask of the respective port.
Defines the name of the respective port sub-network.
Speed of the DPU port of the selected NE.
IP address of the opposite NE (DPU port).
Speed of the NE1 port of the target NE.
The HDLC mode of NE1 port. Enabled only when NE1 (64000
bps is used). The possible modes are Master, Slave and
Disabled.

- 54-

NWD-104045
+

2.9.13.3 Editing PNMS Parameters (for Root NE only) of PASOLINK Mx (Bridge NE), PASOLINK
+
STM-1 (Bridge NE) and PASOLINK PDH (Bridge NE)
This parameter is relevant only to NE designated as Root NE.
To change the PNMS Parameters:
1. Right click on the selected
NE to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the
NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the
NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window
will appear. Click on the
PNMS category to display
the PNMS parameters.
4. In this window, the IP
Address and subnet mask
information of the PNMS
port are defined. The
definitions of these
parameters are listed in
Table 2.25.

Table 2.25 PNMS Parameters of PASOLINK Mx (Bridge NE),


+
+
PASOLINK STM-1 (Bridge NE) and PASOLINK PDH (Bridge NE)
Parameter
PNMS Connection

LAN

IP Address

V.11 (Default)

Subnet Mask
IP Address

Subnet Mask
Speed

Definition
Defines the type of connection to the PNMS used by the Root
NE. The Root NE can connect to the PNMS PC either thru
V.11 (Dial-UP) connection or LAN (IP) connection.
When the Ethernet connection is selected, the LAN input
fields are activated. The IP address defines that it is used by
the IDU LAN port. However, it is only used when the LAN port
is used for connecting the PNMS.
IP address of LAN port of the NE. This is only set if the
selected NE is a Root NE.
Subnet mask of abovementioned LAN port.
When the Dial-Up connection is selected, the V.11 input fields
are activated. The IP address defines that it is used by the
V.11 port of the IDU. Note that is only used when the V.11
port is used for PNMS connection.
Subnet Mask of the V.11 port mentioned above.
Connection speed for dial-up access.

- 55-

NWD-104045
+

2.9.13.4 Editing Routing Parameters of PASOLINK Mx (Bridge NE), PASOLINK STM-1 (Bridge
+
NE) and PASOLINK PDH (Bridge NE)
This parameter is relevant only to NE designated as Root NE.
To change the Routing Parameters:
1. Right click on the selected NE to
display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected
NE to open the NE Properties
window.)
2. Click on Properties to open the
NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will
appear. Click on the Routing
category to display the routing
parameters.
4. The IP address of the Default
Gateway can be set via this
window. The Default Gateway IP
address normally is that of the
PNMS PC / Workstation or the
router associated with the PNMS.

- 56-

NWD-104045
+

2.9.13.5 Editing SNTP Parameters of PASOLINK Mx (Bridge NE), PASOLINK STM-1 (Bridge NE)
+
and PASOLINK PDH (Bridge NE)
Each NE support Simple Network Time Protocol, used to synchronize its internal clock to a
defined Time-server in the network.
To change the SNTP Parameters:
1. Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the SNTP category to display the SNTP
parameters.
a) Root NE

b) Other

4. The Time Synchronization mode can be set in this window. The time on the CTRL
module can either be synchronized to a time-server with SNTP in the network or set to
None (no time synchronization). The IP address of the time-server as well as the Refresh
Interval- (the time in seconds that elapses before the NE will try to synchronize its internal
clock to a specified time-server) can be set in this window.
NOTE: Please reenter the correct SNTP IP Address, when the CTRL Type in the General
category window is changed from Root NE to Root NE (Bridge) or vice- versa.

- 57-

NWD-104045

2.9.13.6 Editing IP Restriction Parameters (for Root NE [Bridge] only) of PASOLINK Mx (Bridge
+
+
NE), PASOLINK STM-1 (Bridge NE) and PASOLINK PDH (Bridge NE)
In network configurations where the Subnet is not supposed to be disconnected at the Root NE,
IP addresses can be preset for devices connected ahead of the Root NE in the IP Restriction
Category window (for instance: IP addresses for the PNMS computer or the router). When
configuring (Create Configuration) with NetCfgToolj, IP addresses (apart from any preregistered
ones) are automatically assigned to other devices. When Root NE (Bridge) is selected as the
CTRL Type, the IP Restriction category is displayed in the Network overview.

No.01

PNMS

Root NE
(Bridge)

No.02

No.04

No.03

Normal NE

Normal NE

Normal NE
Subnet

No.01

PNMS

Router

Root NE
(Bridge)

No.02

Normal NE

No.03

Normal NE

To set the IP Restriction Parameters:


1. Right click on the selected NE to
display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected
NE to open the NE Properties
window.)
2. Click on Properties to open the
NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will
appear. Click on the IP
Restriction category to display
the IP Restriction parameters.
4. To preset/register IP Addresses,
use the Add/Modify/Remove
buttons under Restricted IP
Address for top subnet. (If no IP
addresses need to be preset,
simply proceed to the next step).
5. Under Default Gateway for the
Root NE (Bridge), input the IP
Address of the Default Gateway for the Root NE (Bridge).

- 58-

No.04

Normal NE

NWD-104045

2.9.14 Setting NE Properties of PASOLINK NEO


2.9.14.1 To set or modify the NE properties of PASOLINK NEO:

1.

Right click on the selected


NE to display the context
menu. (Or double click on
the selected NE to open the
NE Properties window.)

2.

Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NE Properties window.

3.

The NE Properties window will appear. The default is the General category window, which
shows the current configuration.

4.

In this window, NE Name, Area Name, Note, CTRL Type, Branch NE Type, NE Name
Position, and Antenna Direction can be changed. The definitions of these parameters are
listed in Table 2.26.

Table 2.26 General Parameters of PASOLINK NEO


Parameter
System

Equipment Type
Network Element
Name
Area Name
Note

CTRL Type

CTRL Type
Branch NE Type

Position/
Direction

Name Position
Antenna
Direction

Port Information

Definition
The type of equipment: PASOLINK NEO.
The name of the NE in the network. Maximum number of
characters possible is 32.
The area where the NE is located (optional). Maximum
number of characters possible is 32.
Additional description, or remarks on the NE (optional).
Maximum number of characters possible is 100.
Role of the CTRL in the network. Root NE,
Root NE (Bridge), Branch NE or Normal NE.
The number of Branch NEs: None,
2 or 3 branches.
The position of the text in the workspace can be customized
here.
The antenna icon in the workspace can be customized to face
either Right or Left.
This provides the IP information of the available port in the
selected NE. The IP address that the port uses and its subnet
mask can be viewed in this section.

- 59-

NWD-104045

2.9.14.2 Editing each Port Parameters of PASOLINK NEO


The Port category displayed in the Network overview changes according to the type of CTRL and
Branch NE that is selected.
To change the respective Port Parameters for PASOLINK NEO:
1. Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the respective Port category to display
the corresponding port information. (NOTE: EM2 (NE) Port, EM1 (NMS) Port)
a) Radio/EM2 Port

b) Radio/EM2/EM1 Port (Bridge)

--- Root NE

--- Normal NE, Root Branch NE (No branch)

Port category

Port category

c) EM2/EM1 Port / Radio Port

d) EM2 Port / Radio/EM1 Port

--- Branch NE (2Branches)

--- Branch NE (2Branches)

Port category

Port category

- 60-

NWD-104045

e) Radio Port / EM2 Port / EM1 Port - Branch NE (3Branches)

Port category

4. In this window, the IP Address for the respective port is defined. These parameters are
defined in Table 2.27.
NOTE: The IP addresses, Subnet Masks can only be manually set if selected in the Assign
IP Address manually or Assign Subnet Mask manually check box.
Table 2.27 Port Parameters for PASOLINK NEO
Parameter
Assign IP Address manually
Assign Subnet Mask manually
Network

Primary
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Subnet Name

Definition
When Assign IP Address manually check box is selected,
user can modify IP Address.
When Assign Subnet Mask manually check box is
selected, user can modify Subnet Mask.
When the Primary check box of a port is selected, that
ports IP address becomes detectable by the PNMS.
IP address of the respective port.
Subnet mask of the respective port.
Defines the name of the respective port sub-network.

- 61-

NWD-104045

2.9.14.3 Editing Async Parameters for PASOLINK NEO


Whenever a PASOLINK NEO is connected via Async to another device (whether it is another
PASOLINK NEO or not), the Async category is displayed in the Network overview.
To change the Async Parameters of PASOLINK NEO:

1. Right click on the selected


NE to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the Async category to display the Async
port information.
4. In this window, the IP Address of the Async port is defined. The definitions of these
parameters are listed in Table 2.28.
Table 2.28 Async Parameters for PASOLINK NEO
Parameter
Common

Data Link

HDLC

IP Address
Subnet Mask
Speed
Mode
Terminal Auto
Assign
Terminate

Definition
Type of data link protocol used by Async. This is always set at
HDLC when connected in multi-drop with another NE. The
data link will be set to PPP when connected to a PASOLINK
V3/PASOLINK V4/MIU CPMC.
IP address of Async port.
Subnet mask of Async port.
Speed of Async port.
Specifies if the Async port is used in HDLC. The Async port
can either be Master, Slave or blank.
Automatically allow the NetCfgToolj to terminate the HDLC
connection of the selected NEs Async port, if it is the last port
in the HDLC line. (Recommended)
If Terminal Auto Assign is set to Manual, the Async port
termination can be set to On or Off.

- 62-

NWD-104045

2.9.14.4 Editing PNMS (EM1/V11) Parameters (for Root NE only) of PASOLINK NEO
When Root NE is selected as the CTRL Type, the PNMS (EM1/V11) category is displayed in the
Network.
Overview:
To change the PNMS (EM1/V11) Parameters:
1. Right click on the selected NE
to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the NE
Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window
will appear. Click on the
PNMS (EM1/V11) category to
display the PNMS (EM1/V11)
parameters.
4. In this window, the IP Address
and subnet mask and default
gateway information of the
PNMS (EM1/V11) port are
defined. The definitions of
these parameters are listed in
Table 2.29.

Table 2.29 PNMS (EM1) Parameters for PASOLINK NEO


Parameter
PNMS Connection

LAN(Default)

IP Address

V.11

Subnet Mask
IP Address

Subnet Mask
Speed
Default Gateway

Definition
Defines the type of connection to the PNMS used by the Root
NE. The Root NE can connect to the PNMS PC either thru
V.11 (Dial-UP) connection or LAN (IP) connection.
When the Ethernet connection is selected, the LAN input
fields are activated. The IP address defines that it is used by
the IDU LAN port. However, it is only used when the LAN port
is used for connecting the PNMS.
IP address of LAN port of the NE. This is only set if the
selected NE is a Root NE.
Subnet mask of abovementioned LAN port.
When the Dial-Up connection is selected, the V.11 input fields
are activated. The IP address defines that it is used by the
V.11 port of the IDU. Note that is only used when the V.11
port is used for PNMS connection.
Subnet Mask of the V.11 port mentioned above.
Connection speed for dial-up access.
Default Gateway of above mentioned EM1 (NMS) port.
Normally the IP address of the PNMS PC / Workstation or the
router associated with the PNMS.

- 63-

NWD-104045

2.9.14.5 Editing Routing Parameters of PASOLINK NEO


To indicate the Routing Parameters of PASOLINK NEO:
1. Right click on the selected NE
to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to open the
NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will
appear. Click on the Routing
category to display the routing
parameters.
4. The IP address of the Default
Gateway can be indicated via
this window. The Default
Gateway IP address of Root NE
is normally the IP address of the
PNMS PC / Workstation or the
router associated with the
PNMS. The first subnet IP address is automatically set as the Default Gateway IP address
for Branch /Normal NEs.
2.9.14.6 Editing SNTP Parameters for PASOLINK NEO
Each NE support Simple Network Time Protocol, used to synchronize its internal clock to a
defined Time-server in the network.
To change the SNTP Parameters of PASOLINK NEO:
1. Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the SNTP category to display the SNTP
parameters.

- 64-

NWD-104045

a) Root NE, Root NE (Bridge)

b) Other

4. The Time Synchronization mode can be set in this window. The time on the CTRL module
can either be synchronized to a time-server with SNTP in the network or set to None (no
time synchronization). The IP address of the time-server as well as the Refresh Interval
(the time in seconds that elapses before the NE will try to synchronize its internal clock to
a specified time-server) can be set in this window.
NOTE: Please reenter the correct SNTP IP Address, when the CTRL Type in the General
category window is changed from Root NE to Root NE (Bridge) or vice- versa.

- 65-

NWD-104045

2.9.14.7 Editing IP Restriction Parameters (for Root NE [Bridge] only) of PASOLINK NEO
In network configurations where the Subnet is not supposed to be disconnected at the Root NE,
IP addresses can be preset for devices connected ahead of the Root NE in the IP Restriction
Category window (for instance: IP addresses for the PNMS computer or the router). When
configuring (Create Configuration) with NetCfgToolj, IP addresses (apart from any preregistered
ones) are automatically assigned to other devices. When Root NE (Bridge) is selected as the
CTRL Type, the IP Restriction category is displayed in the Network overview.

No.01

PNMS

Root NE
(Bridge)

No.02

Normal NE

No.04

No.03

Normal NE

Normal NE
Subnet

No.01

PNMS

Router

Root NE
(Bridge)

No.02

Normal NE

No.03

Normal NE

No.04

Normal NE

To set the IP Restriction Parameters of PASOLINK NEO:


1. Right click on the selected NE to
display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected
NE to open the NE Properties
window.)
2. Click on Properties to open the
NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will
appear. Click on the IP
Restriction category to display
the IP Restriction parameters.
4. To preset/register IP Addresses,
use the Add/Modify/Remove
buttons under Restricted IP
Address for top subnet. (If no IP
addresses need to be preset,
simply proceed to the next step).
5. Under Default Gateway for the Root NE (Bridge), input the IP Address of the Default
Gateway for the Root NE (Bridge).

- 66-

NWD-104045

2.9.15 Setting NE Properties of PASOLINK NEO (1NE)


2.9.15.1 To set or modify the NE properties of PASOLINK NEO (1NE):

1.

Right click on the selected NE


to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)

2.

Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NE Properties window.

3.

The NE Properties window will appear. The default is the General category window, which
shows the current configuration.

4.

In this window, Equipment Type, NE Name, Area Name, Note, CTRL Type, Branch NE Type,
NE Name Position, and Antenna Direction can be changed. The definitions of these
parameters are listed in Table 2.30.

- 67-

NWD-104045

Table 2.30 General Parameters of PASOLINK NEO (1NE)


Parameter
System

Equipment Type
Network Element
Name
Area Name
Note

CTRL Type

CTRL Type
Branch NE Type

Position/
Direction

Name Position
Antenna
Direction

Port Information

Definition
The type of equipment: PASOLINK NEO (2-WAY) and
PASOLINK NEO (Terminal).
The name of the NE in the network. Maximum number of
characters possible is 32.
The area where the NE is located (optional). Maximum
number of characters possible is 32.
Additional description, or remarks on the NE (optional).
Maximum number of characters possible is 100.
Role of the CTRL in the network. Root NE,
Root NE (Bridge), Branch NE or Normal NE.
The number of Branch NEs for PASOLINK NEO (2-WAY):
None, 2, 3 or 4 branches.
The number of Branch NEs for PASOLINK NEO (Terminal):
None, 2 or 3 branches.
The position of the text in the workspace can be customized
here.
The antenna icon in the workspace can be customized to face
either Right or Left.
This provides the IP information of the available port in the
selected NE. The IP address that the port uses and its subnet
mask can be viewed in this section.

- 68-

NWD-104045

2.9.15.2 Editing each Port Parameters of PASOLINK NEO (1NE)


The Port category displayed in the Network overview changes according to the type of CTRL and
Branch NE that is selected.
To change the respective Port Parameters for PASOLINK NEO (1NE):
1. Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the respective Port category to display
the corresponding port information. (NOTE: EM2 (NE) Port, EM1 (NMS) Port)

<PASOLINK NEO (2-WAY)>


a) DIR-A/DIR-B/EM2 Port

b) DIR-A/DIR-B/EM2/EM1 Port

--- Root NE

--- Root NE (Bridge), Normal NE, Branch NE (No branch)

Port category

Port category

c) DIR-A Port / DIR-B/EM2/EM1 Port

d) EM2 Port / DIR-A/DIR-B/EM1 Port

--- Branch NE (2Branches)

--- Branch NE (2Branches)

c) DIR-A Port / DIR-B/EM2/EM1 Port

d) EM2 Port / DIR-A/DIR-B/EM1 Port

--- Branch NE (2Branches)

--- Branch NE (2Branches)

Port category

Port category

- 69-

NWD-104045

e) DIR-A Port / DIR-B Port / EM2/EM1 Port


--- Branch NE (3Branches)

f) DIR-A Port / DIR-B Port / EM2 Port / EM1 Port


--- Branch NE (4Branches)

Port category
Port category

<PASOLINK NEO (Terminal)>


a) Radio/EM2 Port

b) Radio/EM2/EM1 Port

--- Root NE

--- Root NE (Bridge), Normal NE, Branch NE (No branch)

Port category

Port category

- 70-

NWD-104045

c) EM2/EM1 Port / Radio Port

d) EM2 Port / Radio/EM1 Port

--- Branch NE (2Branches)

--- Branch NE (2Branches)

Port category

Port category

e) Radio Port / EM2 Port / EM1 Port

--- Branch NE (3Branches)

Port category

4. In this window, the IP Address for the respective port is defined. These parameters are
defined in Table 2.31.
NOTE: The IP addresses, Subnet Masks can only be manually set if selected in the Assign
IP Address manually or Assign Subnet Mask manually check box.
Table 2.31 Port Parameters for PASOLINK NEO (1NE)
Parameter
Assign IP Address manually
Assign Subnet Mask manually
Network

Primary
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Subnet Name

Definition
When Assign IP Address manually check box is selected,
user can modify IP Address.
When Assign Subnet Mask manually check box is
selected, user can modify Subnet Mask.
When the Primary check box of a port is selected, that
ports IP address becomes detectable by the PNMS.
IP address of the respective port.
Subnet mask of the respective port.
Defines the name of the respective port sub-network.

- 71-

NWD-104045

2.9.15.3 Editing Async Parameters for PASOLINK NEO (1NE)


Whenever a PASOLINK NEO is connected via Async to another device (whether it is another
PASOLINK NEO or not), the Async category is displayed in the Network overview.
To change the Async Parameters of PASOLINK NEO (1NE):

1. Right click on the selected


NE to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the
NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the Async category to display the Async
port information.
4. In this window, the IP Address of the Async port is defined. The definitions of these
parameters are listed in Table 2.32.
Table 2.32 Async Parameters for PASOLINK NEO (1NE)
Parameter
Common

Data Link

HDLC

IP Address
Subnet Mask
Speed
Mode
Terminal Auto
Assign
Terminate

Definition
Type of data link protocol used by Async. This is always set at
HDLC when connected in multi-drop with another NE. The
data link will be set to PPP when connected to a PASOLINK
V3/PASOLINK V4/MIU CPMC.
IP address of Async port.
Subnet mask of Async port.
Speed of Async port.
Specifies if the Async port is used in HDLC. The Async port
can either be Master, Slave or blank.
Automatically allow the NetCfgToolj to terminate the HDLC
connection of the selected NEs Async port, if it is the last port
in the HDLC line. (Recommended)
If Terminal Auto Assign is set to Manual, the Async port
termination can be set to On or Off.

- 72-

NWD-104045

2.9.15.4 Editing PNMS (EM1/V11) Parameters (for Root NE only) of PASOLINK NEO (1NE)
When Root NE is selected as the CTRL Type, the PNMS (EM1/V11) category is displayed in the
Network overview.
To change the PNMS (EM1/V11) Parameters:
1. Right click on the selected NE
to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the NE
Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window
will appear. Click on the
PNMS (EM1/V11) category to
display the PNMS (EM1/V11)
parameters.
4. In this window, the IP Address
and subnet mask and default
gateway information of the
PNMS (EM1/V11) port are
defined. The definitions of
these parameters are listed in
Table 2.33.
Table 2.33 PNMS (EM1/V11) Parameters for PASOLINK NEO (1NE)
Parameter
PNMS Connection

LAN (Default)

IP Address

V.11

Subnet Mask
IP Address

Subnet Mask
Speed
Default Gateway

Definition
Defines the type of connection to the PNMS used by the Root
NE. The Root NE can connect to the PNMS PC either thru
V.11 (Dial-UP) connection or LAN (IP) connection.
When the Ethernet connection is selected, the LAN input
fields are activated. The IP address defines that it is used by
the IDU LAN port. However, it is only used when the LAN port
is used for connecting the PNMS.
IP address of LAN port of the NE. This is only set if the
selected NE is a Root NE.
Subnet mask of abovementioned LAN port.
When the Dial-Up connection is selected, the V.11 input fields
are activated. The IP address defines that it is used by the
V.11 port of the IDU. Note that is only used when the V.11
port is used for PNMS connection.
Subnet Mask of the V.11 port mentioned above.
Connection speed for dial-up access.
Default Gateway of above mentioned EM1 (NMS) port.
Normally the IP address of the PNMS PC / Workstation or the
router associated with the PNMS.

- 73-

NWD-104045

2.9.15.5 Editing Routing Parameters of PASOLINK NEO (1NE)


To indicate the Routing Parameters of PASOLINK NEO (1NE):
1. Right click on the selected
NE to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the
NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to
open the NE Properties
window.
3. The NE Properties
window will appear. Click
on the Routing category to
display the routing
parameters.
4. The IP address of the
Default Gateway can be
indicated via this window.
The Default Gateway IP
address of Root NE is normally the IP address of the PNMS PC / Workstation or the router
associated with the PNMS. The first subnet IP address is automatically set as the Default
Gateway IP address for Branch /Normal NEs.

2.9.15.6 Editing SNTP Parameters for PASOLINK NEO (1NE)


Each NE support Simple Network Time Protocol, used to synchronize its internal clock to a
defined Time-server in the network.
To change the SNTP Parameters of PASOLINK NEO (1NE):
1. Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the SNTP category to display the SNTP
parameters.

- 74-

NWD-104045

a) Root NE, Root NE (Bridge)

b) Other

4. The Time Synchronization mode can be set in this window. The time on the CTRL module
can either be synchronized to a time-server with SNTP in the network or set to None (no
time synchronization). The IP address of the time-server as well as the Refresh Interval
(the time in seconds that elapses before the NE will try to synchronize its internal clock to
a specified time-server) can be set in this window.
NOTE: Please reenter the correct SNTP IP Address, when the CTRL Type in the General
category window is changed from Root NE to Root NE (Bridge) or vice- versa.

- 75-

NWD-104045

2.9.15.7 Editing IP Restriction Parameters (for Root NE [Bridge] only) of PASOLINK NEO (1NE)
In network configurations where the Subnet is not supposed to be disconnected at the Root NE,
IP addresses can be preset for devices connected ahead of the Root NE in the IP Restriction
Category window (for instance: IP addresses for the PNMS computer or the router). When
configuring (Create Configuration) with NetCfgToolj, IP addresses (apart from any preregistered
ones) are automatically assigned to other devices. When Root NE (Bridge) is selected as the
CTRL Type, the IP Restriction category is displayed in the Network overview.

No.01

PNMS

Root NE
(Bridge)

No.02

Normal NE

No.04

No.03

Normal NE

Normal NE
Subnet

No.01

Router

Root NE
(Bridge)

No.02

Normal NE

No.03

Normal NE

No.04

Normal NE

To set the IP Restriction Parameters of PASOLINK NEO (1NE):


1. Right click on the selected NE to
display the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to open the
NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will
appear. Click on the IP
Restriction category to display
the IP Restriction parameters.
4. To preset/register IP Addresses,
use the Add/Modify/Remove
buttons under Restricted IP
Address for top subnet. (If
no IP addresses need to be
preset, simply proceed to the
next step).
5. Under Default Gateway for the Root NE (Bridge), input the IP Address of the Default
Gateway for the Root NE (Bridge).

- 76-

NWD-104045

2.9.16 Setting NE Properties of PASOLINK NEO CPV


2.9.16.1 To set or modify the NE properties of PASOLINK NEO CPV:

1.

Right click on the selected


NE to display the context
menu.(Or double click on
the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)

2.

Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NE Properties window.

3.

The NE Properties window will appear. The default is the General category window, which
shows the current configuration.

4.

In this window, NE Name, Area Name, Note, CTRL Type, Branch NE Type, NE Name
Position, and Antenna Direction can be changed. The definitions of these parameters are
listed in Table 2.34.
Table 2.34 General Parameters of PASOLINK NEO CPV

Parameter
System

Equipment Type
Network Element
Name
Area Name
Note

CTRL Type

CTRL Type
Branch NE Type

Position/
Direction

Name Position
Antenna
Direction

Port Information

Definition
The type of equipment: PASOLINK NEO CPV.
The name of the NE in the network. Maximum number of
characters possible is 32.
The area where the NE is located (optional). Maximum
number of characters possible is 32.
Additional description, or remarks on the NE (optional).
Maximum number of characters possible is 100.
Role of the CTRL in the network. Root NE,
Root NE (Bridge), Branch NE or Normal NE.
The number of Branch NEs: None,
2 or 3 branches.
The position of the text in the workspace can be customized
here.
The antenna icon in the workspace can be customized to face
either Right or Left.
This provides the IP information of the available port in the
selected NE. The IP address that the port uses and its subnet
mask can be viewed in this section.

- 77-

NWD-104045

2.9.16.2 Editing each Port Parameters of PASOLINK NEO CPV


The Port category displayed in the Network overview changes according to the type of CTRL and
Branch NE that is selected.
To change the respective Port Parameters for PASOLINK NEO CPV:
1. Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the respective Port category to display
the corresponding port information. (NOTE: EM2 (NE) Port, EM1 (NMS) Port)
a) Radio/EM2 Port
--- Root NE

b) Radio/EM2/EM1 Port (Bridge)


--- Normal NE, Root Branch NE (No branch)

Port category

Port category

c) EM2/EM1 Port / Radio Port


--- Branch NE (2Brances)

d) EM2 Port / Radio/EM1 Port


--- Branch NE (2Branches)

Port category

Port category

- 78-

NWD-104045

e) Radio Port / EM2 Port / EM1 Port --- Branch NE (3Branches)

4. In this window, the IP Address for the respective port is defined. These parameters are
defined in Table 2.35.
NOTE: The IP addresses, Subnet Masks can only be manually set if selected in the Assign
IP Address manually or Assign Subnet Mask manually check box.
Table 2.35 Port Parameters for PASOLINK NEO CPV
Parameter
Assign IP Address manually
Assign Subnet Mask manually
Network

Primary
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Subnet Name

Definition
When Assign IP Address manually check box is selected,
user can modify IP Address.
When Assign Subnet Mask manually check box is
selected, user can modify Subnet Mask.
When the Primary check box of a port is selected, that
ports IP address becomes detectable by the PNMS.
IP address of the respective port.
Subnet mask of the respective port.
Defines the name of the respective port sub-network.

- 79-

NWD-104045

2.9.16.3 Editing Async Parameters for PASOLINK NEO CPV


Whenever a PASOLINK NEO CPV is connected via Async to another device (whether it is
another PASOLINK NEO CPV or not), the Async category is displayed in the Network overview.
To change the Async Parameters of PASOLINK NEO CPV:

1. Right click on the


selected NE to display the
context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the
NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the
NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the Async category to display the Async
port information.
4. In this window, the IP Address of the Async port is defined. The definitions of these
parameters are listed in Table 2.36.
Table 2.36 Async Parameters for PASOLINK NEO CPV
Parameter
Common

Data Link

HDLC

IP Address
Subnet Mask
Speed
Mode
Terminal Auto
Assign
Terminate

Definition
Type of data link protocol used by Async. This is always set at
HDLC when connected in multi-drop with another NE. The
data link will be set to PPP when connected to a PASOLINK
V3/PASOLINK V4/MIU CPMC.
IP address of Async port.
Subnet mask of Async port.
Speed of Async port.
Specifies if the Async port is used in HDLC. The Async port
can either be Master, Slave or blank.
Automatically allow the NetCfgToolj to terminate the HDLC
connection of the selected NEs Async port, if it is the last port
in the HDLC line. (Recommended)
If Terminal Auto Assign is set to Manual, the Async port
termination can be set to On or Off.

- 80-

NWD-104045

2.9.16.4 Editing PNMS (EM1) Parameters (for Root NE only) of PASOLINK NEO CPV
When Root NE is selected as the CTRL Type, the PNMS (EM1) category is displayed in the
Network overview.
To change the PNMS (EM1) Parameters:
1. Right click on the selected NE to
display the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the NE
Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will
appear. Click on the PNMS
(EM1) category to display the
PNMS (EM1) parameters.
4. In this window, the IP Address
and subnet mask and default
gateway information of the
PNMS (EM1) port are defined.
The definitions of these
parameters are listed in Table
2.37.
Table 2.37 PNMS (EM1) Parameters for PASOLINK NEO CPV
Parameter
LAN

IP Address

Default Gateway

Subnet Mask
IP Address

Definition
The IP address defines the usage by the IDU EM1 (NMS)
port. However, it is only used when the EM1 (NMS) port is
used for connecting to the PNMS
IP address. This is only set if the selected NE is a Root NE.
Subnet mask of above mentioned EM1 (NMS) port.
Default Gateway of above mentioned EM1 (NMS) port.
Normally the IP address of the PNMS PC / Workstation or the
router associated with the PNMS.

- 81-

NWD-104045

2.9.16.5 Editing Routing Parameters of PASOLINK NEO CPV


To indicate the Routing Parameters of PASOLINK NEO CPV:
1. Right click on the selected NE
to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to open
the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window
will appear. Click on the
Routing category to display
the routing parameters.
4. The IP address of the Default
Gateway can be indicated via
this window. The Default
Gateway IP address of Root
NE is normally the IP address
of the PNMS PC /
Workstation or the router
associated with the PNMS.
The first subnet IP address is automatically set as the Default Gateway IP address for
Branch/ Normal NEs.

- 82-

NWD-104045

2.9.16.6 Editing SNTP Parameters for PASOLINK NEO CPV


Each NE support Simple Network Time Protocol, used to synchronize its internal clock to a
defined Time-server in the network.
To change the SNTP Parameters of PASOLINK NEO CPV:
1. Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the SNTP category to display the SNTP
parameters.
a) Root NE, Root NE (Bridge)

b) Other

4. The Time Synchronization mode can be set in this window. The time on the CTRL
module can either be synchronized to a time-server with SNTP in the network or set to
None (no time synchronization). The IP address of the time-server as well as the Refresh
Interval (the time in seconds that elapses before the NE will try to synchronize its internal
clock to a specified time-server) can be set in this window.
NOTE: Please reenter the correct SNTP IP Address, when the CTRL Type in the General
category window is changed from Root NE to Root NE (Bridge) or vice- versa.

- 83-

NWD-104045

2.9.16.7 Editing IP Restriction Parameters (for Root NE [Bridge] only) of PASOLINK NEO CPV
In network configurations where the Subnet is not supposed to be disconnected at the Root NE,
IP addresses can be preset for devices connected ahead of the Root NE in the IP Restriction
Category window (for instance: IP addresses for the PNMS computer or the router). When
configuring (Create Configuration) with NetCfgToolj, IP addresses (apart from any preregistered
ones) are automatically assigned to other devices. When Root NE (Bridge) is selected as the
CTRL Type, the IP Restriction category is displayed in the Network overview.

No.01

PNMS

Root NE
(Bridge)

No.02

No.04

No.03

Normal NE

Normal NE

Normal NE
Subnet

No.01

PNMS

Router

No.02

Root NE
(Bridge)

Normal NE

No.03

Normal NE

No.04

Normal NE

To set the IP Restriction Parameters of PASOLINK NEO CPV:


1. Right click on the selected NE to
display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected
NE to open the NE Properties
window.)
2. Click on Properties to open the NE
Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will
appear. Click on the IP Restriction
category to display the IP
Restriction parameters.
4. To preset/register IP Addresses,
use the Add/Modify/Remove
buttons under Restricted IP
Address for top subnet. (If no IP
addresses need to be preset,
simply proceed to the next step.)
5. Under Default Gateway for the Root NE (Bridge), input the IP Address of the Default
Gateway for the Root NE (Bridge).

- 84-

NWD-104045

2.9.17 Setting NE Properties of PASOLINK NEO CPV (1NE)


2.9.17.1 To set or modify the NE properties of PASOLINK NEO CPV (1NE):

1. Right click on the selected


NE to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2.

Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NE Properties window.

3.

The NE Properties window will appear. The default is the General category window,
which shows the current configuration.

4.

In this window, Equipment Type, NE Name, Area Name, Note, CTRL Type, Branch NE
Type, NE Name Position, and Antenna Direction can be changed. The definitions of
these parameters are listed in Table 2.38.

Table 2.38 General Parameters of PASOLINK NEO CPV (1NE)


Parameter
System

Equipment Type
Network Element
Name
Area Name
Note

CTRL Type

CTRL Type
Branch NE Type

Position/
Direction

Name Position
Antenna
Direction

Port Information

Definition
The type of equipment:
PASOLINK NEO CPV (Terminal).
The name of the NE in the network. Maximum number of
characters possible is 32.
The area where the NE is located (optional). Maximum
number of characters possible is 32.
Additional description, or remarks on the NE (optional).
Maximum number of characters possible is 100.
Role of the CTRL in the network. Root NE, Root NE (Bridge),
Branch NE or Normal NE.
The number of Branch NEs for PASOLINK NEO CPV
(Terminal): None, 2 or 3 branches.
The position of the text in the workspace can be customized
here.
The antenna icon in the workspace can be customized to face
either Right or Left.
This provides the IP information of the available port in the
selected NE. The IP address that the port uses and its subnet
mask can be viewed in this section.

- 85-

NWD-104045

2.9.17.2 Editing each Port Parameters of PASOLINK NEO CPV (1NE)


The Port category displayed in the Network overview changes according to the type of CTRL and
Branch NE that is selected.
To change the respective Port Parameters for PASOLINK NEO CPV (1NE):
1. Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the respective Port category to display
the corresponding port information. (NOTE: EM2 (NE) Port, EM1 (NMS) Port)
<PASOLINK NEO CPV (Terminal)>
a) Radio/EM2 Port
--- Root NE

b) Radio/EM2/EM1 Port
--- Root NE (Bridge), Normal NE, Branch NE (No branch)

Port category

Port category

c) EM2/EM1 Port / Radio Port


--- Branch NE (2Brances)

d) EM2 Port / Radio/EM1 Port


--- Branch NE (2Branches)

Port category

Port category

- 86-

NWD-104045

e) Radio Port / EM2 Port / EM1 Port --- Branch NE (3Branches)

4. In this window, the IP Address for the respective port is defined. These parameters are
defined in Table 2.39.
NOTE: The IP addresses, Subnet Masks can only be manually set if selected in the Assign
IP Address manually or Assign Subnet Mask manually check box.
Table 2.39 Port Parameters for PASOLINK NEO CPV (1NE)
Parameter
Assign IP Address manually
Assign Subnet Mask manually
Network

Primary
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Subnet Name

Definition
When Assign IP Address manually check box is selected,
user can modify IP Address.
When Assign Subnet Mask manually check box is
selected, user can modify Subnet Mask.
When the Primary check box of a port is selected, that
ports IP address becomes detectable by the PNMS.
IP address of the respective port.
Subnet mask of the respective port.
Defines the name of the respective port sub-network.

- 87-

NWD-104045

2.9.17.3 Editing Async Parameters for PASOLINK NEO CPV (1NE)


Whenever a PASOLINK NEO CPV is connected via Async to another device (whether it is
another PASOLINK NEO CPV or not), the Async category is displayed in the Network overview.
To change the Async Parameters of PASOLINK NEO CPV (1NE):

1. Right click on the


selected NE to display
the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the
NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in
the context menu to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the Async category to display the Async
port information.
4. In this window, the IP Address of the Async port is defined. The definitions of these
parameters are listed in Table 2.40.
Table 2.40 Async Parameters for PASOLINK NEO CPV (1NE)
Parameter
Common

Data Link

HDLC

IP Address
Subnet Mask
Speed
Mode
Terminal Auto
Assign
Terminate

Definition
Type of data link protocol used by Async. This is always set at
HDLC when connected in multi-drop with another NE. The
data link will be set to PPP when connected to a PASOLINK
V3/PASOLINK V4/MIU CPMC.
IP address of Async port.
Subnet mask of Async port.
Speed of Async port.
Specifies if the Async port is used in HDLC. The Async port
can either be Master, Slave or blank.
Automatically allow the NetCfgToolj to terminate the HDLC
connection of the selected NEs Async port, if it is the last port
in the HDLC line. (Recommended)
If Terminal Auto Assign is set to Manual, the Async port
termination can be set to On or Off.

- 88-

NWD-104045

2.9.17.4 Editing PNMS (EM1) Parameters (for Root NE only) of PASOLINK NEO CPV (1NE)
When Root NE is selected as the CTRL Type, the PNMS (EM1) category is displayed in the
Network overview.
To change the PNMS (EM1) Parameters:
1. Right click on the selected NE to
display the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the NE
Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will
appear. Click on the PNMS
(EM1) category to display the
PNMS (EM1) parameters.
4. In this window, the IP Address
and subnet mask and default
gateway information of the
PNMS (EM1) port are defined.
The definitions of these
parameters are listed in Table
2.41.
Table 2.41 PNMS (EM1) Parameters for PASOLINK NEO CPV (1NE)
Parameter
LAN

Default
Gateway

IP Address

Subnet Mask
IP Address

Definition
The IP address defines the usage by the IDU EM1 (NMS)
port. However, it is only used when the EM1 (NMS) port is
used for connecting to the PNMS.
IP address. This is only set if the selected NE is a Root NE.
Subnet mask of above mentioned EM1 (NMS) port.
Default Gateway of above mentioned EM1 (NMS) port.
Normally the IP address of the PNMS PC / Workstation or the
router associated with the PNMS.

- 89-

NWD-104045

2.9.17.5 Editing Routing Parameters of PASOLINK NEO CPV (1NE)


To indicate the Routing Parameters of PASOLINK NEO CPV (1NE):
1. Right click on the selected
NE to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to open
the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window
will appear. Click on the
Routing category to display
the routing parameters.
4. The IP address of the
Default Gateway can be
indicated via this window.
The Default Gateway IP
address of Root NE is
normally the IP address of
the PNMS PC / Workstation
or the router associated with the PNMS. The first subnet IP address is automatically set as
the Default Gateway IP address for Branch /Normal NEs.

- 90-

NWD-104045

2.9.17.6 Editing SNTP Parameters for PASOLINK NEO CPV (1NE)


Each NE support Simple Network Time Protocol, used to synchronize its internal clock to a
defined Time-server in the network.
To change the SNTP Parameters of PASOLINK NEO CPV (1NE):
1. Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the SNTP category to display the SNTP
parameters.
a) Root NE, Root NE (Bridge)

b) Other

4. The Time Synchronization mode can be set in this window. The time on the CTRL module
can either be synchronized to a time-server with SNTP in the network or set to None (no
time synchronization). The IP address of the time-server as well as the Refresh Interval
(the time in seconds that elapses before the NE will try to synchronize its internal clock to
a specified time-server) can be set in this window.
NOTE: Please reenter the correct SNTP IP Address, when the CTRL Type in the General
category window is changed from Root NE to Root NE (Bridge) or vice- versa.

- 91-

NWD-104045

2.9.17.7 Editing IP Restriction Parameters (for Root NE [Bridge] only) of PASOLINK NEO CPV
(1NE)
In network configurations where the Subnet is not supposed to be disconnected at the Root NE,
IP addresses can be preset for devices connected ahead of the Root NE in the IP Restriction
Category window (for instance: IP addresses for the PNMS computer or the router). When
configuring (Create Configuration) with NetCfgToolj, IP addresses (apart from any preregistered
ones) are automatically assigned to other devices. When Root NE (Bridge) is selected as the
CTRL Type, the IP Restriction category is displayed in the Network overview.

No.01

PNMS

Root NE
(Bridge)

No.02

Normal NE

No.04

No.03

Normal NE

Normal NE
Subnet

No.01

Router

Root NE
(Bridge)

No.02

Normal NE

No.03

Normal NE

No.04

Normal NE

To set the IP Restriction Parameters of PASOLINK NEO CPV (1NE):


1. Right click on the selected NE
to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to open
the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window
will appear. Click on the IP
Restriction category to
display the IP Restriction
parameters.
4. To preset/register IP
Addresses, use the
Add/Modify/Remove buttons
under Restricted IP Address
for top subnet. (If no IP
addresses need to be preset,
simply proceed to the next
step).
5. Under Default Gateway for the Root NE (Bridge), input the IP Address of the Default
Gateway for the Root NE (Bridge).

- 92-

NWD-104045

2.9.18 Setting NE Properties of PASOLINK NEO NODAL


2.9.18.1 Group Settings for PASOLINK NEO NODAL
PASOLINK NEO NODALs default configuration is four IDUs comprising one group.
Essentially, any IDU configuration between 1 and 4 is possible.

1. Right click on the selected NODAL Group to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected NODAL Group to open the NODAL Group Properties
window.)
2. Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NODAL Group Properties window.
3. The NODAL Group Properties window will appear. The default is the NODAL Group
General category window, which shows the current configuration.
4. This window shows the System and Symbol settings as well as the IP address.

Table 2.42 NODAL Group General Parameters of PASOLINK NEO NODAL


Parameter
System
IP Address

Definition
Number of IDUs

Defines the number of IDUs in the NODAL Group (1-4)


- Is only displayed for the respective Number of IDUs; specifically

for only those NEs in use (within the group).


- 0.0.0.0. is displayed for NEs to which an IP Address has not been
allocated yet (i.e. prior to "Create Configuration" process).

Symbol

Name
Name Position

The name of the NODAL Group in the network. Maximum


number of characters possible is 32.
The position of the text in the workspace can be customized
here.

- 93-

NWD-104045

5. Clicking the button (a) and keeping it depressed (with the mouse) displays all the
parameter settings for the respective NEs. Proceeding to (b) click General.
(a)

(b)

The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs. Each IDUs functions differ
according to its position within the group: top, intermediate or bottom (end); as illustrated
below:
top

intermediate
IDU #2 in a three IDU configuration
IDUs #2 / #3 in a four IDU configuration
bottom
IDU #2 in a two IDU configuration
IDU #3 in a three IDU configuration
IDU #4 in a four IDU configuration

- 94-

NWD-104045

2.9.18.2 To set or modify the NE properties of PASOLINK NEO NODAL


In this window, the NE Name, Area Name, Note, CTRL Type, Branch NE Type, NE Name
Position, and Antenna Direction can be changed. These parameters are defined in Table
2.43.

- 95-

NWD-104045

Table 2.43 General Parameters of PASOLINK NEO NODAL


Parameter
System
Equipment Type

Definition
The type of equipment: PASOLINK NEO NODAL
(2-WAY), PASOLINK NEO NODAL (Terminal)
and PASOLINK NEO NODAL (Tributary Only).
The name of the NE in the network. Maximum
number of characters possible is 32.
The area where the NE is located (optional).
Maximum number of characters possible is 32.
Additional description, or remarks on the NE
(optional). Maximum number of characters
possible is 100.
Role of the CTRL in the network. Root NE,
Root NE (Bridge), Branch NE or Normal NE.
The number of Branch NEs: None, 2, 3 or 4
branches.
The position of the text in the workspace can be
customized here.

Network Element Name


Area Name
Note

CTRL
Type

CTRL Type
Branch NE Type

Position/
Direction

Name Position
Antenna
Direction

Line
Direction

2-WAY

top
Inter-mediate
bottom
Terminal top
Inter-mediate
bottom
Tributary top
Only
Inter-mediate
bottom
2-WAY
top
Inter-mediate
bottom
top
Inter-mediate
bottom
Tributary top
Only
Inter-mediate
bottom

Not displayed

The antenna icon in the workspace can be


customized to face either Right or Left.

Not displayed
The antenna icon in the workspace can be
customized to face either Upper, Right or Left.
Not displayed
The antenna icon in the workspace can be
customized to face either Lower, Right or Left.

Terminal

Port Information

- 96-

Not displayed
The antenna icon in the workspace can be
customized to face either Upper, Right or Left.
Not displayed
The antenna icon in the workspace can be
customized to face either Lower, Right or Left.
This provides the IP information of the available
port in the selected NE. The IP address that the
port uses and its subnet mask can be viewed in
this section.

NWD-104045

2.9.18.3 Editing each Port Parameters of PASOLINK NEO NODAL


The Port category displayed in the Network overview changes according to the type of CTRL and
Branch NE that is selected.
To change the respective Port Parameters for PASOLINK NEO NODAL:
1. Right click on the selected
NODAL Group to display
the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NODAL Group to
open the NODAL Group
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the
NODAL Group Properties
window.
3. The NODAL Group
Properties window will
appear.
4. Select the NE to be
modified.
5. Click on the respective Port category to display the corresponding port information.
An example for the General settings in the right and window (above) is as follows:
Equipment Type: PASOLINK NEO NODAL (2-WAY)
CTRL Type: Root NE
Branch NE Type: Disable

- 97-

NWD-104045

The Port display differs according to Equipment Type, Branch NE Type, IDU configuration.
Equipment Type
PASOLINK NEO
NODAL (2-WAY)

IDU
top
bottom

Branch NE Type
No branch
2 branches
3 branches

4 branches

intermediate

No branch
2 branches
3 branches

PASOLINK NEO
NODAL (Terminal)

top
bottom

No branch
2 branches
3 branches

PASOLINK NEO
NODAL (Tributary
Only)

intermediate

2 branches

top
bottom

No branch
2 branches

intermediate

Port configuration
Dir-A/Dir-B/EM2/EM1
Dir-A
Dir-B/EM2/EM1
Dir-A
Dir-B
EM2/EM1
Dir-A
Dir-B
EM2
EM1
Dir-A/Dir-B/EM2/EM1
Dir-A
Dir-B/EM2/EM1
Dir-A
Dir-B
EM2/EM1
Radio/EM2/EM1
Radio
EM2/EM1
Radio
EM2
EM1
Radio
EM2/EM1
EM2/EM1
EM2
EM1
-

NOTE:
- When Tributary Only is E1 Tributary Only, it is configured so that the modem can
only be connected to the power supply in/out (no ODU connections).
- When a Tributary Only IDU is in the intermediate position, there is no Port
combination available. Please refer to Appendix L 1.

- 98-

NWD-104045

Equipment Type, CTRL Type, Branch NE Type, IDU parameter configuration


*2-WAY
Equipment
Type

CTRL
Type

Root NE

Branch NE
Type

Not available

IDU

top

intermediate/bottom

Root NE
(Bridge)

Not available

top

intermediate/bottom

2 Branch

top
intermediate
bottom

Top
2-WAY

Branch
NE

3 Branch

intermediate

bottom

Normal
NE

4 Branch

Top

Not available

top
intermediate
bottom

- 99-

Category
General
DIR-A/DIR-B/EM2
PNMS (EM1)
Routing
SNTP
General
DIR-A/DIR-B/EM2
PNMS (EM1)
Routing
SNTP
General
DIR-A
DIR-B/EM1/EM2
Routing
SNTP
General
EM2/EM1
DIR-A
DIR-B
Routing
SNTP
General
EM1/EM2
DIR-A
DIR-B
Routing
SNTP
General
EM1
EM2
DIR-A
DIR-B
Routing
SNTP
General
DIR-A
DIR-B/EM1/EM2
Routing
SNTP

NWD-104045

*Terminal
Equipment
Type

CTRL
Type

Root NE

Branch
NE Type

Not
available

IDU

top

intermediate
bottom

Root NE
(Bridge)

Not
available

top

intermediate
bottom

top
intermediate

2 Branch
Terminal

bottom

Branch
NE
top

3 Branch

intermediate

bottom

Normal
NE

Not
available

top
intermediate
bottom

- 100-

Category
General
Radio/EM2
PNMS (EM1)
Routing
SNTP
General
Radio/EM1/EM2
Routing
SNTP
General
EM2/EM1
Radio
Routing
SNTP
General
EM2/EM1
Radio
EM2
Routing
SNTP
General
EM2
EM1
Radio
Routing
SNTP
General
EM1
EM2
Radio
Routing
SNTP
General
Radio/EM1/EM2
Routing
SNTP

NWD-104045

*Tributary Only
Equipment
Type

CTRL
Type

Root NE

Branch
NE Type

Not
available

IDU

top

intermediate
bottom

Root NE
(Bridge)

Not
available

top

intermediate
bottom
Tributary
Only
top

Branch
NE

2 Branch

intermediate

bottom

Normal
NE

Not
available

top
intermediate
bottom

Category
General
EM2
PNMS (EM1)
Routing
SNTP
General
EM2/EM1
IR Restricion
Routing
SNTP
General
EM2
EM1
Routing
SNTP
General
EM2
EM1
Routing
SNTP
General
EM2/EM1
Routing
SNTP

6. In this window, the IP Address for the respective port is defined. These parameters are
defined in Table 2.44.
NOTE: The IP addresses, Subnet Masks can only be manually set if selected in the Assign
IP Address manually or Assign Subnet Mask manually check box.

- 101-

NWD-104045

Table 2.44 Port Parameters for PASOLINK NEO NODAL


Parameter
Assign IP Address manually
Assign Subnet Mask manually
Network

Primary
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Subnet Name

Definition
When Assign IP Address manually check box is selected,
user can modify IP Address.
When Assign Subnet Mask manually check box is
selected, user can modify Subnet Mask.
When the Primary check box of a port is selected, that
ports IP address becomes detectable by the PNMS.
IP address of the respective port.
Subnet mask of the respective port.
Defines the name of the respective port sub-network.

- 102-

NWD-104045

2.9.18.4 Editing Async Parameters for PASOLINK NEO NODAL


Whenever a PASOLINK NEO NODAL is connected via Async to another device (whether it is
another PASOLINK NEO NODAL or not), the Async category is displayed in the Network
overview.
To change the Async Parameters of PASOLINK NEO NODAL:

1. Right click on the


selected NODAL
Group to display the
context menu.
(Or double click on
the selected NODAL
Group to open the
NODAL Group
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NODAL Group Properties window.
3. The NODAL Group Properties window will appear.
4. Select the NE to be modified.
5. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the Async category to display the Async
port information.
6. In this window, the IP Address of the Async port is defined. The definitions of these
parameters are listed in Table 2.45.
Table 2.45 Async Parameters for PASOLINK NEO NODAL
Parameter
Common

Data Link

HDLC

IP Address
Subnet Mask
Speed
Mode
Terminal Auto
Assign
Terminate

Definition
Type of data link protocol used by Async. This is always set at
HDLC when connected in multi-drop with another NE. The
data link will be set to PPP when connected to a PASOLINK
V3/PASOLINK V4/MIU CPMC.
IP address of Async port.
Subnet mask of Async port.
Speed of Async port.
Specifies if the Async port is used in HDLC. The Async port
can either be Master, Slave or blank.
Automatically allow the NetCfgToolj to terminate the HDLC
connection of the selected NEs Async port, if it is the last port
in the HDLC line. (Recommended)
If Terminal Auto Assign is set to Manual, the Async port
termination can be set to On or Off.

- 103-

NWD-104045

2.9.18.5 Editing PNMS (EM1) Parameters (for Root NE only) of PASOLINK NEO NODAL
When Root NE is selected as the CTRL Type, the PNMS (EM1) category is displayed in the
Network overview.
To change the PNMS (EM1) Parameters:
1. Right click on the selected
NODAL Group to display
the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NODAL Group to
open the NODAL Group
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the
NODAL Group Properties
window.
3. The NODAL Group
Properties window will
appear.
4. Select the NE to be
modified.
5. The NE Properties window
will appear. Click on the PNMS (EM1) category to display the PNMS (EM1) parameters.
6. In this window, the IP Address and subnet mask and default gateway information of the
PNMS (EM1) port are defined. The definitions of these parameters are listed in Table 2.46.
Table 2.46 PNMS (EM1) Parameters for PASOLINK NEO NODAL
Parameter
LAN

Default
Gateway

IP Address

Subnet Mask
IP Address

Definition
The IP address defines the usage by the IDU EM1 (NMS)
port. However, it is only used when the EM1 (NMS) port is
used for connecting to the PNMS.
IP address. This is only set if the selected NE is a Root NE.
Subnet mask of above mentioned EM1 (NMS) port.
Default Gateway of above mentioned EM1 (NMS) port.
Normally the IP address of the PNMS PC / Workstation or the
router associated with the PNMS.

- 104-

NWD-104045

2.9.18.6 Editing Routing Parameters of PASOLINK NEO NODAL


To indicate the Routing Parameters of PASOLINK NEO NODAL:
1. Right click on the selected
NODAL Group to display
the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NODAL Group to
open the NODAL Group
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the
NODAL Group Properties
window.
3. The NODAL Group
Properties window will
appear.
4. Select the NE to be modified.
5. The NE Properties window
will appear. Click on the
Routing category to display the routing parameters.
6. The IP address of the Default Gateway can be indicated via this window. The Default
Gateway IP address of Root NE is normally the IP address of the PNMS PC / Workstation
or the router associated with the PNMS. The first subnet IP address is automatically set as
the Default Gateway IP address for Branch /Normal NEs.

- 105-

NWD-104045

2.9.18.7 Editing SNTP Parameters for PASOLINK NEO NODAL


Each NE support Simple Network Time Protocol, used to synchronize its internal clock to a
defined Time-server in the network.
To change the SNTP Parameters of PASOLINK NEO NODAL:
1. Right click on the selected NODAL Group to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected NODAL Group to open the NODAL Group Properties
window.)
2. Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NODAL Group Properties window.
3. The NODAL Group Properties window will appear.
4. Select the NE to be modified.
5. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the SNTP category to display the SNTP
parameters.
a) Root NE, Root NE (Bridge)

b) Other

6. The Time Synchronization mode can be set in this window. The time on the CTRL module
can either be synchronized to a time-server with SNTP in the network or set to None (no
time synchronization). The IP address of the time-server as well as the Refresh Interval
(the time in seconds that elapses before the NE will try to synchronize its internal clock to
a specified time-server) can be set in this window.
NOTE: Please reenter the correct SNTP IP Address, when the CTRL Type in the General
category window is changed from Root NE to Root NE (Bridge) or vice- versa.

- 106-

NWD-104045

2.9.18.8 Editing IP Restriction Parameters (for Root NE [Bridge] only) of PASOLINK NEO NODAL
In network configurations where the Subnet is not supposed to be disconnected at the Root NE,
IP addresses can be preset for devices connected ahead of the Root NE in the IP Restriction
Category window (for instance: IP addresses for the PNMS computer or the router). When
configuring (Create Configuration) with NetCfgToolj, IP addresses (apart from any preregistered
ones) are automatically assigned to other devices. When Root NE (Bridge) is selected as the
CTRL Type, the IP Restriction category is displayed in the Network overview.

PNMS
Router

No.02

Root NE
(Bridge) No.01
#1

No.03

No.04

No.01
#2

No.05

No.06

No.01
#3

No.07

No.08

No.01
#4

No.09

Normal NE

Normal NE

No.1 is PASOLINK NEO NODAL


The other IDUs are NEO series (including NEO NODAL).

- 107-

NWD-104045

To set the IP Restriction Parameters of PASOLINK NEO NODAL:


1. Right click on the selected
NODAL Group to display
the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NODAL Group to
open the NODAL Group
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the
NODAL Group Properties
window.
3. The NODAL Group
Properties window will
appear.
4. Select the NE to be
modified.
5. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the IP Restriction category to display the
IP Restriction parameters.
6. To preset/register IP Addresses, use the Add/Modify/Remove buttons under Restricted
IP Address for top subnet. (If no IP addresses need to be preset, simply proceed to the
next step).
7. Under Default Gateway for the Root NE (Bridge), input the IP Address of the Default
Gateway for the Root NE (Bridge).

- 108-

NWD-104045

2.9.19 Setting NE Properties of PASOLINK NEO/a


2.9.19.1 To set or modify the NE properties of PASOLINK NEO/a
In this window, the Redundancy, NE Name, Area Name, Note, RCP Type, Branch NE Type,
NE Name Position, and Line Direction can be changed. These parameters are defined in
Table 2.47.

- 109-

NWD-104045

Table 2.47 General Parameters of PASOLINK NEO/a


Parameter
System
Equipment Type
Redundancy
SW Group 1
SW Group 2
SW Group 3
Network Element Name
Area Name
Note
RCP Type RCP Type
Branch NE Type
Position/
Direction

Name Position
Line Direction

Port Information

Definition
The type of equipment: PASOLINK NEO/a
The SW Group 1: Not Used, 1+0(1),1+0(2), 1+0(1 2),
1+1(Hot Standby), 1+1(Twin Path)
The SW Group 1: Not Used, 1+0(1),1+0(2), 1+0(1 2),
1+1(Hot Standby), 1+1(Twin Path)
The SW Group 1: Not Used, 1+0(1),1+0(2), 1+0(1 2),
1+1(Hot Standby), 1+1(Twin Path)
The name of the NE in the network. Maximum number
of characters possible is 32.
The area where the NE is located (optional). Maximum
number of characters possible is 32.
Additional description, or remarks on the NE (optional).
Maximum number of characters possible is 100.
Role of the RCP in the network. Root NE,
Root NE (Bridge), Branch NE or Normal NE.
The number of Branch NEs: None,
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 branches.
The position of the text in the workspace can be
customized here.
The antenna icon in the workspace can be customized
to face either Upper, Right or Left.
This provides the IP information of the available port in
the selected NE. The IP address that the port uses and
its subnet mask can be viewed in this section.

- 110-

NWD-104045

2.9.19.2 Editing each Port Parameters of PASOLINK NEO/a


The Port category displayed in the Network overview changes according to the type of RCP and
Branch NE that is selected.
To change the respective Port Parameters for PASOLINK NEO/a:

1. Right click on the selected


NEO/a to display the
context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NEO/a to open the
NEO/a Properties
window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the
NEO/a Properties window.
3. The NEO/a Properties window will appear.
4. Click on the respective Port category to display the corresponding port information.

An example for the General settings in the right and window (above) is as follows:
SW Group1: 1+0(1 2)
SW Group2: 1+0(1 2)
SW Group3: 1+0(1 2)
RCP Type: Root NE
Branch NE Type: Disable

- 111-

NWD-104045

The Port display differs according to SW Group, RCP Type, and Branch NE Type.
SW
Group1
Not Used

SW
Group2
Not Used

1+0(1)/
1+1 (Hot
Standby)/
1+1(Twin
Path)

SW
Group3
1+0(1)/
1+1 (Hot
Standby)/
1+1(Twin
Path)

RCP
Type
Root NE

Branch NE Type
Not available
Not available

1+0(2)

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE
Normal NE
Root NE

Not available

1+0(1 2)

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE
Normal NE
Root NE
Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Not available

Not Used

1+0(1)/
1+1 (Hot
Standby)/
1+1(Twin
Path)

1+0(2)

Normal NE
Root NE

2Branch/3Branch
Not available
Not available

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch
Not available
Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE
Normal NE
Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Not available

Normal NE
Root NE
Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

1+0(1 2)

2Branch/3Branch
Not available
Not available

Normal NE
Root NE

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE
Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch
Not available
Not available

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch
Not available
Not available
Not available
2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch
Not available
Not available

Not available
2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5 Branch
Not available

- 112-

Port configuration
MODEM5/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM5/EM2/EM1
MODEM5/EM2/EM1
MODEM5/EM2/EM1
MODEM6/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM5/MODEM6/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM5/MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM5/MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM5/MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM3/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM3/EM2/EM1
MODEM3/EM2/EM1
MODEM3/EM2/EM1
MODEM3/MODEM5/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM3/MODEM5/EM2/EM1
MODEM3/MODEM5/EM2/EM1
MODEM3/MODEM5/EM2/EM1
MODEM3/MODEM6/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM3/MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM3/MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM3/MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM3/MODEM5/MODEM6/
EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM3/MODEM5/MODEM6/
EM2/ EM1
MODEM3/MODEM5/MODEM6/
EM2/ EM1
MODEM3/MODEM5/MODEM6/
EM2/ EM1

NWD-104045

SW
Group1
Not Used

SW
Group2
1+0(2)

SW
Group3
Not Used

1+0(1)/
1+1(Hot
Standby)/
1+1(Twin
Path)

1+0(2)

RCP
Type
Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Not available

Normal NE
Root NE

Normal NE
Root NE

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

1+0(1 2)

Not Used

1+0(1)/
1+1(Hot
Standby)/
1+1(Twin
Path)

1+0(2)

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE
Normal NE
Root NE

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

1+0(1 2)

Branch NE Type

2Branch/3Branch
Not available
Not available

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch
Not available
Not available
Not available
2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch
Not available
Not available

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch
Not available

Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Not available

Normal NE
Root NE

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch
Not available
Not available

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch
Not available

Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch
Not available

- 113-

Port configuration
MODEM4/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM4/EM2/ EM1
MODEM4/EM2/ EM1
MODEM4/EM2/ EM1
MODEM4/MODEM5/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM4/MODEM5/EM2/ EM1
MODEM4/MODEM5/EM2/ EM1
MODEM4/MODEM5/EM2/ EM1
MODEM4/MODEM6/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM4/MODEM6/EM2/ EM1
MODEM4/MODEM6/EM2/ EM1
MODEM4/MODEM6/EM2/ EM1
MODEM4/MODEM5/MODEM6/
EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM4/MODEM5/MODEM6/
EM2/ EM1
MODEM4/MODEM5/MODEM6/
EM2/ EM1
MODEM4/MODEM5/MODEM6/
EM2/ EM1
MODEM3/MODEM4/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM3/MODEM4/EM2/ EM1
MODEM3/MODEM4/EM2/ EM1
MODEM3/MODEM4/EM2/ EM1
MODEM3/MODEM4/MODEM5/
EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM3/MODEM4/MODEM5/
EM2/ EM1
MODEM3/MODEM4/MODEM5/
EM2/ EM1
MODEM3/MODEM4/MODEM5/
EM2/ EM1
MODEM3/MODEM4/MODEM6/
EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM3/MODEM4/MODEM6/
EM2/ EM1
MODEM3/MODEM4/MODEM6/
EM2/ EM1
MODEM3/MODEM4/MODEM6/
EM2/ EM1

NWD-104045

SW
Group1
Not Used

SW
Group2
1+0(1 2)

SW
Group3
1+0(1 2)

RCP
Type
Root NE

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

1+0(1)/
1+1(Hot
Standby)/
1+1(Twin
Path)

Not Used

Not Used

1+0(1)/
1+1(Hot
Standby)/
1+1(Twin
Path)

1+0(2)

Not Used

1+0(1)/
1+1(Hot
Standby)/
1+1(Twin
Path)

Not available

Normal NE
Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE
Normal NE
Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Not available

Normal NE
Root NE

Normal NE
Root NE

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

1+0(1)/
1+1(Hot
Standby)/
1+1(Twin
Path)

Not available

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch/
6Branch
Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

1+0(1 2)

Branch NE Type

2Branch/3Branch
Not available
Not available

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch
Not available
Not available
Not available
2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch
Not available
Not available

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch
Not available

Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Not available

Normal NE
Root NE

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE
Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch
Not available
Not available

Not available
2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch
Not available

- 114-

Port configuration
MODEM3/MODEM4/MODEM5/
MODEM6/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM3/MODEM4/MODEM5/
MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM3/MODEM4/MODEM5/
MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM3/MODEM4/MODEM5/
MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM1/EM2/ EM1
MODEM1/EM2/ EM1
MODEM1/EM2/ EM1
MODEM1/MODEM5/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM1/MODEM5/EM2/ EM1
MODEM1/MODEM5/EM2/ EM1
MODEM1/MODEM5/EM2/ EM1
MODEM1/MODEM6/EM2/
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM1/MODEM6/ EM2/ EM1
MODEM1/MODEM6/ EM2/ EM1
MODEM1/MODEM6/ EM2/ EM1
MODEM1/MODEM5/MODEM6/
EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM1/MODEM5/MODEM6/
EM2/ EM1
MODEM1/MODEM5/MODEM6/
EM2/ EM1
MODEM1/MODEM5/MODEM6/
EM2/ EM1
MODEM1/MODEM3/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM1/MODEM3/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM3/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM3/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM3/MODEM5/
EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM1/MODEM3/MODEM5/
EM2/ EM1
MODEM1/MODEM3/MODEM5/
EM2/ EM1
MODEM1/MODEM3/MODEM5/
EM2/ EM1

NWD-104045

SW
Group1
1+0(1)/
1+1(Hot
Standby)/
1+1(Twin
Path)

SW
Group2
1+0(1)/
1+1(Hot
Standby)/
1+1(Twin
Path)

SW
Group3
1+0(2)

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

1+0(1 2)

1+0(2)

RCP
Type
Root NE

Not Used

1+0(1)/
1+1(Hot
Standby)/
1+1(Twin
Path)

1+0(2)

1+0(1 2)

Branch NE Type
Not available

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch
Not available

Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch/
6Branch
Not available

Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Not available

Normal NE
Root NE

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch
Not available
Not available

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch
Not available

Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch
Not available

Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch/
6Branch
Not available

- 115-

Port configuration
MODEM1/MODEM3/MODEM6/
EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM1/MODEM3/MODEM6/
EM2/ EM1
MODEM1/MODEM3/MODEM6/
EM2/ EM1
MODEM1/MODEM3/MODEM6/
EM2/ EM1
MODEM1/MODEM3/MODEM5/
MODEM6/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM1/MODEM3/MODEM5/
MODEM6/EM2/ EM1
MODEM1/MODEM3/MODEM5/
MODEM6/EM2/ EM1
MODEM1/MODEM3/MODEM5/
MODEM6/EM2/ EM1
MODEM1/MODEM4/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM1/MODEM4/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM4/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM4/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM4/MODEM5/
EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM1/MODEM4/MODEM5/
EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM4/MODEM5/
EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM4/MODEM5/
EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM4/MODEM6/
EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM1/MODEM4/MODEM6/
EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM4/MODEM6/
EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM4/MODEM6/
EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM4/MODEM5/
MODEM6/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM1/MODEM4/MODEM5/
MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM4/MODEM5/
MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM4/MODEM5/
MODEM6/EM2/EM1

NWD-104045

SW
Group1
1+0(1)/
1+1(Hot
Standby)/
1+1(Twin
Path)

SW
Group2
1+0(1 2)

SW
Group3
Not Used

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

1+0(1)/
1+1(Hot
Standby)/
1+1(Twin
Path)

1+0(2)

1+0(1 2)

1+0(2)

RCP
Type
Root NE

Not Used

Not Used

1+0(1)/
1+1(Hot
Standby)/
1+1(Twin
Path)

Branch NE Type
Not available

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch
Not available

Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch/
6Branch
Not available

Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch/
6Branch
Not available

Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)

Not available

Branch NE

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch/
6Branch/7Branch
Not available

Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE
Normal NE
Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch
Not available
Not available

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch
Not available

- 116-

Port configuration
MODEM1/MODEM3/MODEM4/
EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM1/MODEM3/MODEM4/
EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM3/MODEM4/
EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM3/MODEM4/
EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM3/MODEM4/
MODEM5/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM1/MODEM3/MODEM4/
MODEM5/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM3/MODEM4/
MODEM5/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM3/MODEM4/
MODEM5/EM2/ EM1
MODEM1/MODEM3/MODEM4/
MODEM6/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM1/MODEM3/MODEM4/
MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM3/MODEM4/
MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM3/MODEM4/
MODEM6/EM2/ EM1
MODEM1/MODEM3/MODEM4/
MODEM5/ MODEM6/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM1/MODEM3/MODEM4/
MODEM5/ MODEM6/EM2/
EM1
MODEM1/MODEM3/MODEM4/
MODEM5/ MODEM6/EM2/
EM1
MODEM1/MODEM3/MODEM4/
MODEM5/ MODEM6/EM2/
EM1
MODEM2/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM2/EM2/EM1
MODEM2/EM2/EM1
MODEM2/EM2/ EM1
MODEM2/MODEM5/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM2/MODEM5/EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM5/EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM5/EM2/EM1

NWD-104045

SW
Group1
1+0(2)

SW
Group2
Not Used

SW
Group3
1+0(2)

RCP
Type
Root NE
Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

1+0(1 2)

Normal NE
Root NE

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

1+0(1)/
1+1(Hot
Standby)/
1+1(Twin
Path)

Not Used

1+0(1)/
1+1(Hot
Standby)/
1+1(Twin
Path)

1+0(2)

1+0(1 2)

1+0(2)

Not Used

Branch NE Type
Not available
Not available
2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch
Not available
Not available

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch
Not available

Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Not available

Normal NE
Root NE

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch
Not available
Not available

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch
Not available

Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch
Not available

Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch/
6Branch
Not available

Normal NE

Not available

Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch
Not available

- 117-

Port configuration
MODEM2/MODEM6/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM2/MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM5/MODEM6/
EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM2/MODEM5/MODEM6/
EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM5/MODEM6/
EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM5/MODEM6/
EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM3/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM2/MODEM3/EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM3/EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM3/EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM3/MODEM5/
EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM2/MODEM3/MODEM5/
EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM3/MODEM5/
EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM3/MODEM5/
EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM3/MODEM6/
EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM2/MODEM3/MODEM6/
EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM3/MODEM6/
EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM3/MODEM6/
EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM3/MODEM5/
MODEM6/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM2/MODEM3/MODEM5/
MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM3/MODEM5/
MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM3/MODEM5/
MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM4/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM2/MODEM4/EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM4/EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM4/EM2/EM1

NWD-104045

SW
Group1
1+0(2)

SW
Group2
1+0(2)

SW
Group3
1+0(1)/
1+1(Hot
Standby)/
1+1(Twin
Path)

1+0(2)

1+0(1 2)

1+0(1 2)

Not Used

1+0(1)/
1+1(Hot
Standby)/
1+1(Twin
Path)

1+0(2)

RCP
Type
Root NE

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Branch NE Type
Not available

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch
Not available

Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch
Not available

Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch/
6Branch
Not available

Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch
Not available

Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch/
6Branch
Not available

Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch/
6Branch
Not available

- 118-

Port configuration
MODEM2/MODEM4/MODEM5/
EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM2/MODEM4/MODEM5/
EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM4/MODEM5/
EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM4/MODEM5/
EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM4/MODEM6/
EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM2/MODEM4/MODEM6/
EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM4/MODEM6/
EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM4/MODEM6/
EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM4/MODEM5/
MODEM6/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM2/MODEM4/MODEM5/
MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM4/MODEM5/
MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM4/MODEM5/
MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM3/MODEM4/
EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM2/MODEM3/MODEM4/
EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM3/MODEM4/
EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM3/MODEM4/
EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM3/MODEM4/
MODEM5/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM2/MODEM3/MODEM4/
MODEM5/EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM3/MODEM4/
MODEM5/EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM3/MODEM4/
MODEM5/EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM3/MODEM4/
MODEM6/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM2/MODEM3/MODEM4/
MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM3/MODEM4/
MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM2/MODEM3/MODEM4/
MODEM6/EM2/EM1

NWD-104045

SW
Group1
1+0(2)

SW
Group2
1+0(1 2)

SW
Group3
1+0(1 2)

RCP
Type
Root NE

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

1+0(1 2)

Not Used

Not Used

1+0(1)/
1+1(Hot
Standby)/
1+1(Twin
Path)

1+0(2)

1+0(1 2)

1+0(1)/
1+1(Hot
Standby)/
1+1(Twin
Path)

Not Used

Branch NE Type
Not available

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch/
6Branch/7 Branch
Not available

Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Not available

Normal NE
Root NE

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch
Not available
Not available

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch
Not available

Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch
Not available

Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch/
6Branch
Not available

Normal NE

Not available

Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch
Not available

- 119-

Port configuration
MODEM2/MODEM3/MODEM4/
MODEM5/MODEM6/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM2/MODEM3/MODEM4/
MODEM5/MODEM6/EM2/ EM1
MODEM2/MODEM3/MODEM4/
MODEM5/MODEM6/EM2/ EM1
MODEM2/MODEM3/MODEM4/
MODEM5/MODEM6/EM2/ EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM1/MODEM2/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM5/
EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM5/
EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM5/
EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM5/
EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM6/
EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM6/
EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM6/
EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM6/
EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM5/
MODEM6/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM5/
MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM5/
MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM5/
MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM3/
EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM3/
EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM3/
EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM3/
EM2/EM1

NWD-104045

SW
Group1
1+0(1 2)

SW
Group2
1+0(1)/
1+1(Hot
Standby)/
1+1(Twin
Path)

SW
Group3
1+0(1)/
1+1(Hot
Standby)/
1+1(Twin
Path)

1+0(2)

1+0(1 2)

1+0(2)

Not Used

1+0(1)/
1+1(Hot
Standby)/
1+1(Twin
Path)

1+0(2)

RCP
Type
Root NE

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Branch NE Type
Not available

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch/
6Branch
Not available

Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch/
6Branch
Not available

Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch/
6Branch/7Branch
Not available

Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch
Not available

Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch/
6Branch
Not available

Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch/
6Branch
Not available

- 120-

Port configuration
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM3/
MODEM5/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM3/
MODEM5/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM3/
MODEM5/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM3/
MODEM5/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM3/
MODEM6/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM3/
MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM3/
MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM3/
MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM3/
MODEM5/MODEM6/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM3/
MODEM5/MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM3/
MODEM5/MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM3/
MODEM5/MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM4/
EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM4/
EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM4/
EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM4/
EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM4/
MODEM5/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM4/
MODEM5/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM4/
MODEM5/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM4/
MODEM5/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM4/
MODEM6/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM4/
MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM4/
MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM4/
MODEM6/EM2/ EM1

NWD-104045

SW
Group1
1+0(1 2)

SW
Group2
1+0(2)

SW
Group3
1+0(1 2)

RCP
Type
Root NE

Root NE
(Bridge)

1+0(1 2)

Not Used

1+0(1)/
1+1(Hot
Standby)/
1+1(Twin
Path)

1+0(2)

1+0(1 2)

Branch NE Type
Not available

Branch NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch/
6Branch/7Branch
Not available

Normal NE

Not available

Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch/
6Branch
Not available

Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch/
6Branch/7Branch
Not available

Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)
Branch NE

Not available

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch/
6Branch/7Branch
Not available

Root NE

Not available

Root NE
(Bridge)

Not available

Branch NE

Normal NE

2Branch/3Branch/
4Branch/5Branch/
6Branch/7Branch/
8Branch
Not available

- 121-

Port configuration
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM4/
MODEM5/MODEM6/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM4/
MODEM5/MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM4/
MODEM5/MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM4/
MODEM5/MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM3/
MODEM4/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM3/
MODEM4/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM3/
MODEM4/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM3/
MODEM4/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM3/
MODEM4/MODEM5/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM3/
MODEM4/MODEM5/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM3/
MODEM4/MODEM5/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM3/
MODEM4/MODEM5/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM3/
MODEM4/MODEM6/EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM3/
MODEM4/MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM3/
MODEM4/MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM3/
MODEM4/MODEM6/EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM3/
MODEM4/MODEM5/MODEM6/
EM2
PNMS(EM1)
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM3/
MODEM4/MODEM5/MODEM6/
EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM3/
MODEM4/MODEM5/MODEM6/
EM2/EM1
MODEM1/MODEM2/MODEM3/
MODEM4/MODEM5/MODEM6/
EM2/EM1

NWD-104045

5. In this window, the IP Address for the respective port is defined. These parameters are
defined in Table 2.48.
NOTE: The IP addresses, Subnet Masks can only be manually set if selected in the Assign
IP Address manually or Assign Subnet Mask manually check box.
Table 2.48 Port Parameters for PASOLINK NEO/a
Parameter
Assign IP Address manually
Assign Subnet Mask manually
Network

Primary
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Subnet Name

Definition
When Assign IP Address manually check box is selected,
user can modify IP Address.
When Assign Subnet Mask manually check box is
selected, user can modify Subnet Mask.
When the Primary check box of a port is selected, that ports
IP address becomes detectable by the PNMS.
IP address of the respective port.
Subnet mask of the respective port.
Defines the name of the respective port sub-network.

- 122 -

NWD-104045

2.9.19.3 Editing Async Parameters for PASOLINK NEO/a


Whenever a PASOLINK NEO/a is connected via Async to another device (whether it is another
PASOLINK NEO NEO/a or not), the Async category is displayed in the Network overview.
To change the Async Parameters of PASOLINK NEO/a:

1. Right click on the selected NEO/a to display the context menu.


(Or double click on the selected NEO/a to open the NEO/a Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NEO/a Properties window.
3. The NEO/a Properties window will appear.
4. Click on the Async category to display the Async port information.
5. In this window, the IP Address of the Async port is defined. The definitions of these
parameters are listed in Table 2.49.

- 123 -

NWD-104045

Table 2.49 Async Parameters for PASOLINK NEO/a


Parameter
Common

Data Link

HDLC

IP Address
Subnet Mask
Speed
Mode
Terminal Auto
Assign
Terminate

Definition
Type of data link protocol used by Async. This is always set at
HDLC when connected in multi-drop with another NE. The
data link will be set to PPP when connected to a PASOLINK
V3/PASOLINK V4/MIU CPMC.
IP address of Async port.
Subnet mask of Async port.
Speed of Async port.
Specifies if the Async port is used in HDLC. The Async port
can either be Master, Slave or blank.
Automatically allow the NetCfgToolj to terminate the HDLC
connection of the selected NEs Async port, if it is the last port
in the HDLC line. (Recommended)
If Terminal Auto Assign is set to Manual, the Async port
termination can be set to On or Off.

- 124 -

NWD-104045

2.9.19.4 Editing PNMS (EM1/V11) Parameters (for Root NE only) of PASOLINK NEO/a
When Root NE is selected as the CTRL Type, the PNMS (EM1/V11) category is displayed in the
Network.
Overview:
To change the PNMS (EM1/V11) Parameters:
1. Right click on the selected
NE to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the
NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the
NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window
will appear. Click on the
PNMS (EM1/V11) category
to display the PNMS
(EM1/V11) parameters.
4. In this window, the IP
Address and subnet mask
and default gateway
information of the PNMS
(EM1/V11) port are defined.
The definitions of these
parameters are listed in
Table 2.50.

Table 2.50 PNMS (EM1/V11) Parameters for PASOLINK NEO/a


Parameter
PNMS Connection

LAN(Default)

IP Address

V.11

Subnet Mask
IP Address

Subnet Mask
Speed
Default Gateway

Definition
Defines the type of connection to the PNMS used by the Root
NE. The Root NE can connect to the PNMS PC either thru
V.11 (Dial-UP) connection or LAN (IP) connection.
When the Ethernet connection is selected, the LAN input
fields are activated. The IP address defines that it is used by
the IDU LAN port. However, it is only used when the LAN port
is used for connecting the PNMS.
IP address of LAN port of the NE. This is only set if the
selected NE is a Root NE.
Subnet mask of abovementioned LAN port.
When the Dial-Up connection is selected, the V.11 input fields
are activated. The IP address defines that it is used by the
V.11 port of the IDU. Note that is only used when the V.11
port is used for PNMS connection.
Subnet Mask of the V.11 port mentioned above.
Connection speed for dial-up access.
Default Gateway of above mentioned EM1 (NMS) port.
Normally the IP address of the PNMS PC / Workstation or the
router associated with the PNMS.

- 125 -

NWD-104045

2.9.19.5 Editing Routing Parameters of PASOLINK NEO/a


To indicate the Routing Parameters of PASOLINK NEO/a:
1. Right click on the
selected NEO/a to display
the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NEO/a to open
the NEO/a Properties
window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the
NEO/a Properties
window.
3. The NEO/a Properties
window will appear.
4. Click on the Routing
category to display the
routing parameters.
5. The IP address of the
Default Gateway can be
indicated via this window.
The Default Gateway IP
address of Root NE is
normally the IP address of the PNMS PC / Workstation or the router associated with the
PNMS. The first subnet IP address is automatically set as the Default Gateway IP
address for Branch /Normal NEs.

- 126 -

NWD-104045

2.9.19.6 Editing SNTP Parameters for PASOLINK NEO/a


Each NE support Simple Network Time Protocol, used to synchronize its internal clock to a
defined Time-server in the network.
To change the SNTP Parameters of PASOLINK NEO/a:
1. Right click on the selected NEO/a to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected NEO/a to open the NEO/a Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NEO/a Properties window.
3. The NEO/a Properties window will appear.
4. Click on the SNTP category to display the SNTP parameters.
a) Root NE, Root NE (Bridge)

b) Other

5. The Time Synchronization mode can be set in this window. The time on the RCP module
can either be synchronized to a time-server with SNTP in the network or set to None (no
time synchronization). The IP address of the time-server as well as the Refresh Interval
(the time in seconds that elapses before the NE will try to synchronize its internal clock to
a specified time-server) can be set in this window.
NOTE: Please reenter the correct SNTP IP Address, when the RCP Type in the General
category window is changed from Root NE to Root NE (Bridge) or vice- versa.

- 127 -

NWD-104045

2.9.19.7 Editing IP Restriction Parameters (for Root NE [Bridge] only) of PASOLINK NEO/a
In network configurations where the Subnet is not supposed to be disconnected at the Root NE,
IP addresses can be preset for devices connected ahead of the Root NE in the IP Restriction
Category window (for instance: IP addresses for the PNMS computer or the router). When
configuring (Create Configuration) with NetCfgToolj, IP addresses (apart from any preregistered
ones) are automatically assigned to other devices. When Root NE (Bridge) is selected as the
RCP Type, the IP Restriction category is displayed in the Network overview.

PNMS
Router

No.06

No.04

No.07

No.01

No.02

No.05

No.03

Root NE
(Bridge)
Normal NE

Normal NE

No.1 is PASOLINK NEO/a


The other IDUs are NEO series (including NEO/a).

- 128 -

NWD-104045

To set the IP Restriction Parameters of PASOLINK NEO/a:


1. Right click on the
selected NEO/a to
display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NEO/a to open
the NEO/a Properties
window.)
2. Click on Properties in
the context menu to
open the NEO/a
Properties window.
3. The NEO/a Properties
window will appear.
4. Click on the IP
Restriction category to
display the IP
Restriction parameters.
5. To preset/register IP
Addresses, use the
Add/Modify/Remove
buttons under
Restricted IP Address for top subnet. (If no IP addresses need to be preset, simply
proceed to the next step).
6. Under Default Gateway for the Root NE (Bridge), input the IP Address of the Default
Gateway for the Root NE (Bridge).

- 129 -

NWD-104045

2.9.20 Setting NE Properties of PASOLINK NEO HP


2.9.20.1 To set or modify the NE properties of PASOLINK NEO HP:

1.

Right click on the selected


NE to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the
NE Properties window.)

2.

Click on Properties in the


context menu to open the NE Properties window.

3.

The NE Properties window will be displayed as shown below. The default is the General
category window, which shows the current configuration.

4.

In this window, NE Name, Area Name, Note, CTRL Type, Branch NE Type, NE Name
Position, and Antenna Direction can be changed. The definitions of these parameters are
listed in Table 2.51.

Table 2.51 General Parameters of PASOLINK NEO HP


Parameter
System

Definition
The type of equipment: PASOLINK NEO HP.
The name of the NE in the network. Maximum number of
characters possible is 32.
The area where the NE is located (optional). Maximum
number of characters possible is 32.
Note
Additional description, or remarks on the NE (optional).
Maximum number of characters possible is 100.
CTRL Type
CTRL Type
Role of the CTRL in the network. Root NE,
Root NE (Bridge), Branch NE or Normal NE.
Branch NE Type
The number of Branch NEs: None,
2 or 3 branches.
Position/
Name Position
The position of the text in the workspace can be customized
Direction
here.
Antenna Direction The antenna icon in the workspace can be customized to face
either Right or Left.
Port Information
This provides the IP information of the available port in the
selected NE. The IP address that the port uses and its subnet
mask can be viewed in this section.
Equipment Type
Network Element
Name
Area Name

- 130 -

NWD-104045

2.9.20.2 Editing each Port Parameters of PASOLINK NEO HP


The Port category displayed in the Network overview changes according to the type of CTRL and
Branch NE that is selected.
To change the respective Port Parameters for PASOLINK NEO HP:
1. Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the respective Port category to display
the corresponding port information. (NOTE: EM2 (NE) Port, EM1 (NMS) Port)
a) Radio/EM2 Port
--- Root NE

b) Radio/EM2/EM1 Port (Bridge)


--- Normal NE, Root Branch NE (No branch)

Port category

Port category

c) EM2/EM1 Port / Radio Port


--- Branch NE (2Brances)

d) EM2 Port / Radio/EM1 Port


--- Branch NE (2Branches)

Port category

Port category

- 131 -

NWD-104045

e) Radio Port / EM2 Port / EM1 Port --- Branch NE (3Branches)

4. In this window, the IP Address for the respective port is defined. These parameters are
defined in Table 2.52.
NOTE: The IP addresses, Subnet Masks can only be manually set if selected in the Assign
IP Address manually or Assign Subnet Mask manually check box.
Table 2.52 Port Parameters for PASOLINK NEO HP
Parameter
Assign IP Address manually
Assign Subnet Mask manually
Network

Primary
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Subnet Name

Definition
When Assign IP Address manually check box is selected,
user can modify IP Address.
When Assign Subnet Mask manually check box is
selected, user can modify Subnet Mask.
When the Primary check box of a port is selected, that ports
IP address becomes detectable by the PNMS.
IP address of the respective port.
Subnet mask of the respective port.
Defines the name of the respective port sub-network.

- 132 -

NWD-104045

2.9.20.3 Editing Async Parameters for PASOLINK NEO HP


Whenever a PASOLINK NEO HP is connected via Async to another device (whether it is
another PASOLINK NEO HP or not), the Async category is displayed in the Network overview.
To change the Async Parameters of PASOLINK NEO HP:

1. Right click on the selected NE


to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the NE
Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the Async category to display the Async
port information.
4. In this window, the IP Address of the Async port is defined. The definitions of these
parameters are listed in Table 2.53.
Table 2.53 Async Parameters for PASOLINK NEO HP
Parameter
Common

Data Link

HDLC

IP Address
Subnet Mask
Speed
Mode
Terminal Auto
Assign
Terminate

Definition
Type of data link protocol used by Async. This is always set at
HDLC when connected in multi-drop with another NE. The
data link will be set to PPP when connected to a PASOLINK
V3/PASOLINK V4/MIU CPMC.
IP address of Async port.
Subnet mask of Async port.
Speed of Async port.
Specifies if the Async port is used in HDLC. The Async port
can either be Master, Slave or blank.
Automatically allow the NetCfgToolj to terminate the HDLC
connection of the selected NEs Async port, if it is the last port
in the HDLC line. (Recommended)
If Terminal Auto Assign is set to Manual, the Async port
termination can be set to On or Off.

- 133 -

NWD-104045

2.9.20.4 Editing PNMS (EM1/V11) Parameters (for Root NE only) of PASOLINK NEO HP
When Root NE is selected as the CTRL Type, the PNMS (EM1/V11) category is displayed in the
Network.
Overview:
To change the PNMS (EM1/V11) Parameters:
1. Right click on the selected NE
to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the NE
Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window
will appear. Click on the
PNMS (EM1/V11) category to
display the PNMS (EM1/V11)
parameters.
4. In this window, the IP Address
and subnet mask and default
gateway information of the
PNMS (EM1/V11) port are
defined. The definitions of
these parameters are listed in
Table 2.54.

Table 2.54 PNMS (EM1/V11) Parameters for PASOLINK NEO HP


Parameter
PNMS Connection

LAN(Default)

IP Address

V.11

Subnet Mask
IP Address

Subnet Mask
Speed
Default Gateway

Definition
Defines the type of connection to the PNMS used by the Root
NE. The Root NE can connect to the PNMS PC either thru
V.11 (Dial-UP) connection or LAN (IP) connection.
When the Ethernet connection is selected, the LAN input
fields are activated. The IP address defines that it is used by
the IDU LAN port. However, it is only used when the LAN port
is used for connecting the PNMS.
IP address of LAN port of the NE. This is only set if the
selected NE is a Root NE.
Subnet mask of abovementioned LAN port.
When the Dial-Up connection is selected, the V.11 input fields
are activated. The IP address defines that it is used by the
V.11 port of the IDU. Note that is only used when the V.11
port is used for PNMS connection.
Subnet Mask of the V.11 port mentioned above.
Connection speed for dial-up access.
Default Gateway of above mentioned EM1 (NMS) port.
Normally the IP address of the PNMS PC / Workstation or the
router associated with the PNMS.

- 134 -

NWD-104045

2.9.20.5 Editing Routing Parameters of PASOLINK NEO HP


To indicate the Routing Parameters of PASOLINK NEO HP:
1. Right click on the selected
NE to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to open
the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window
will appear. Click on the
Routing category to display
the routing parameters.
4. The IP address of the Default
Gateway can be indicated via
this window. The Default
Gateway IP address of Root
NE is normally the IP address
of the PNMS PC/ Workstation
or the router associated with
the PNMS. The first subnet IP address is automatically set as the Default Gateway IP
address for Branch/ Normal NEs.

2.9.20.6 Editing SNTP Parameters for PASOLINK NEO HP


Each NE support Simple Network Time Protocol, used to synchronize its internal clock to a
defined Time-server in the network.
To change the SNTP Parameters of PASOLINK NEO HP:
1. Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the SNTP category to display the SNTP
parameters.

- 135 -

NWD-104045

a) Root NE, Root NE (Bridge)

b) Other

4. The Time Synchronization mode can be set in this window. The time on the CRTL module
can either be synchronized to a time-server with SNTP in the network or set to None (no
time synchronization). The IP address of the time-server as well as the Refresh Interval
(the time in seconds that elapses before the NE will try to synchronize its internal clock to
a specified time-server) can be set in this window.
NOTE: Please reenter the correct SNTP IP Address, when the CTRL Type in the General
category window is changed from Root NE to Root NE (Bridge) or vice- versa.

- 136 -

NWD-104045

2.9.20.7 Editing IP Restriction Parameters (for Root NE [Bridge] only) of PASOLINK NEO HP
In network configurations where the Subnet is not supposed to be disconnected at the Root NE,
IP addresses can be preset for devices connected ahead of the Root NE in the IP Restriction
Category window (for instance: IP addresses for the PNMS computer or the router). When
configuring (Create Configuration) with NetCfgToolj, IP addresses (apart from any preregistered
ones) are automatically assigned to other devices. When Root NE (Bridge) is selected as the
CTRL Type, the IP Restriction category is displayed in the Network overview.

No.01

PNMS

Root NE
(Bridge)

No.02

Normal NE

No.03

No.04

Normal NE

Normal NE
Subnet

No.01

PNMS

Router

Root NE
(Bridge)

No.02

Normal NE

No.03

Normal NE

No.04

Normal NE

To set the IP Restriction Parameters of PASOLINK NEO HP:


1. Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to
open the NE Properties
window.
3. The NE Properties
window will appear. Click
on the IP Restriction
category to display the IP
Restriction parameters.
4. To preset/register IP
Addresses, use the
Add/Modify/Remove
buttons under Restricted
IP Address for top
subnet. (If no IP
addresses need to be
preset, simply proceed to
the next step).
5. Under Default Gateway
for the Root NE (Bridge),
input the IP Address of the
Default Gateway for the
Root NE (Bridge).

- 137 -

NWD-104045

2.9.21 Setting NE Properties of PASOLINK NEO HP/A


2.9.21.1 To set or modify the NE properties of PASOLINK NEO HP/A:

1.

Right click on the selected


NE to display the context
menu. (Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)

2.

Click on Properties in the


context menu to open the NE Properties window.

3.

The NE Properties window will be displayed as shown below. The default is the General
category window, which shows the current configuration.

4.

In this window, NE Name, Area Name, Note, CTRL Type, Branch NE Type, NE Name
Position, and Antenna Direction can be changed. The definitions of these parameters are
listed in Table 2.55.

Table 2.55 General Parameters of PASOLINK NEO HP/A


Parameter
System

Definition
The type of equipment: PASOLINK NEO HP/A.
The name of the NE in the network. Maximum number of
characters possible is 32.
The area where the NE is located (optional). Maximum
number of characters possible is 32.
Note
Additional description, or remarks on the NE (optional).
Maximum number of characters possible is 100.
CTRL Type
CTRL Type
Role of the CTRL in the network. Root NE,
Root NE (Bridge), Branch NE or Normal NE.
Branch NE Type
The number of Branch NEs: None,
2, or 3 branches.
Position/
Name Position
The position of the text in the workspace can be customized
Direction
here.
Antenna Direction The antenna icon in the workspace can be customized to face
either Right or Left.
Port Information
This provides the IP information of the available port in the
selected NE. The IP address that the port uses and its subnet
mask can be viewed in this section.
Equipment Type
Network Element
Name
Area Name

- 138 -

NWD-104045

2.9.21.2 Editing each Port Parameters of PASOLINK NEO HP/A


The Port category displayed in the Network overview changes according to the type of CTRL and
Branch NE that is selected.
To change the respective Port Parameters for PASOLINK NEO HP/A:
1. Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the respective Port category to display
the corresponding port information. (NOTE: EM2 (NE) Port, EM1 (NMS) Port)
a) Radio/EM2 Port
--- Root NE

b) Radio/EM2/EM1 Port (Bridge)


--- Normal NE, Root Branch NE (No branch)

Port category

Port category

c) EM2/EM1 Port / Radio Port


--- Branch NE (2Brances)

d) EM2 Port / Radio/EM1 Port


--- Branch NE (2Branches)

Port category

Port category

- 139 -

NWD-104045
e) Radio Port / EM2 Port / EM1 Port --- Branch NE (3Branches)

4. In this window, the IP Address for the respective port is defined. These parameters are
defined in Table 2.56.
NOTE: The IP addresses, Subnet Masks can only be manually set if selected in the Assign
IP Address manually or Assign Subnet Mask manually check box.
Table 2.56 Port Parameters for PASOLINK NEO HP/A
Parameter
Assign IP Address manually
Assign Subnet Mask manually
Network

Primary
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Subnet Name

Definition
When Assign IP Address manually check box is selected,
user can modify IP Address.
When Assign Subnet Mask manually check box is
selected, user can modify Subnet Mask.
When the Primary check box of a port is selected, that ports
IP address becomes detectable by the PNMS.
IP address of the respective port.
Subnet mask of the respective port.
Defines the name of the respective port sub-network.

- 140 -

NWD-104045
2.9.21.3 Editing Async Parameters for PASOLINK NEO HP/A
Whenever a PASOLINK NEO HP/A is connected via Async to another device (whether it is
another PASOLINK NEO HP/A or not), the Async category is displayed in the Network overview.
To change the Async Parameters of PASOLINK NEO HP/A:

1. Right click on the selected


NE to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the
NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the Async category to display the Async
port information.
4. In this window, the IP Address of the Async port is defined. The definitions of these
parameters are listed in Table 2.57.
Table 2.57 Async Parameters for PASOLINK NEO HP/A
Parameter
Common

Data Link

HDLC

IP Address
Subnet Mask
Speed
Mode
Terminal Auto
Assign
Terminate

Definition
Type of data link protocol used by Async. This is always set at
HDLC when connected in multi-drop with another NE. The
data link will be set to PPP when connected to a PASOLINK
V3/PASOLINK V4/MIU CPMC.
IP address of Async port.
Subnet mask of Async port.
Speed of Async port.
Specifies if the Async port is used in HDLC. The Async port
can either be Master, Slave or blank.
Automatically allow the NetCfgToolj to terminate the HDLC
connection of the selected NEs Async port, if it is the last port
in the HDLC line. (Recommended)
If Terminal Auto Assign is set to Manual, the Async port
termination can be set to On or Off.

- 141 -

NWD-104045
2.9.21.4 Editing PNMS (EM1) Parameters (for Root NE only) of PASOLINK NEO HP/A
When Root NE is selected as the CTRL Type, the PNMS (EM1/V11) category is displayed in the
Network.
Overview:
To change the PNMS (EM1/V11) Parameters:
1. Right click on the selected NE
to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the NE
Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window
will appear. Click on the
PNMS (EM1/V11) category to
display the PNMS (EM1/V11)
parameters.
4. In this window, the IP Address
and subnet mask and default
gateway information of the
PNMS (EM1/V11) port are
defined. The definitions of
these parameters are listed in
Table 2.58.

Table 2.58 PNMS (EM1/V11) Parameters for PASOLINK NEO HP/A


Parameter
PNMS Connection

LAN(Default)

IP Address

V.11

Subnet Mask
IP Address

Subnet Mask
Speed
Default Gateway

Definition
Defines the type of connection to the PNMS used by the Root
NE. The Root NE can connect to the PNMS PC either thru
V.11 (Dial-UP) connection or LAN (IP) connection.
When the Ethernet connection is selected, the LAN input
fields are activated. The IP address defines that it is used by
the IDU LAN port. However, it is only used when the LAN port
is used for connecting the PNMS.
IP address of LAN port of the NE. This is only set if the
selected NE is a Root NE.
Subnet mask of abovementioned LAN port.
When the Dial-Up connection is selected, the V.11 input fields
are activated. The IP address defines that it is used by the
V.11 port of the IDU. Note that is only used when the V.11
port is used for PNMS connection.
Subnet Mask of the V.11 port mentioned above.
Connection speed for dial-up access.
Default Gateway of above mentioned EM1 (NMS) port.
Normally the IP address of the PNMS PC / Workstation or the
router associated with the PNMS.

- 142 -

NWD-104045
2.9.21.5 Editing Routing Parameters of PASOLINK NEO HP/A
To indicate the Routing Parameters of PASOLINK NEO HP/A:
1. Right click on the selected
NE to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to open
the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window
will appear. Click on the
Routing category to display
the routing parameters.
4. The IP address of the Default
Gateway can be indicated via
this window. The Default
Gateway IP address of Root
NE is normally the IP address
of the PNMS PC/ Workstation
or the router associated with
the PNMS. The first subnet IP address is automatically set as the Default Gateway IP
address for Branch/ Normal NEs.

- 143 -

NWD-104045
2.9.21.6 Editing SNTP Parameters for PASOLINK NEO HP/A
Each NE support Simple Network Time Protocol, used to synchronize its internal clock to a
defined Time-server in the network.
To change the SNTP Parameters of PASOLINK NEO HP/A:
1. Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the SNTP category to display the SNTP
parameters.
a) Root NE, Root NE (Bridge)

b) Other

4. The Time Synchronization mode can be set in this window. The time on the CRTL module
can either be synchronized to a time-server with SNTP in the network or set to None (no
time synchronization). The IP address of the time-server as well as the Refresh Interval
(the time in seconds that elapses before the NE will try to synchronize its internal clock to
a specified time-server) can be set in this window.
NOTE: Please reenter the correct SNTP IP Address, when the CTRL Type in the General
category window is changed from Root NE to Root NE (Bridge) or vice- versa.

- 144 -

NWD-104045
2.9.21.7 Editing IP Restriction Parameters (for Root NE [Bridge] only) of PASOLINK NEO HP/A
In network configurations where the Subnet is not supposed to be disconnected at the Root NE,
IP addresses can be preset for devices connected ahead of the Root NE in the IP Restriction
Category window (for instance: IP addresses for the PNMS computer or the router). When
configuring (Create Configuration) with NetCfgToolj, IP addresses (apart from any preregistered
ones) are automatically assigned to other devices. When Root NE (Bridge) is selected as the
CTRL Type, the IP Restriction category is displayed in the Network overview.

No.01

PNMS

Root NE
(Bridge)

No.02

Normal NE

No.03

No.04

Normal NE

Normal NE
Subnet

No.01

PNMS

Router

Root NE
(Bridge)

No.02

Normal NE

No.03

Normal NE

No.04

Normal NE

To set the IP Restriction Parameters of PASOLINK NEO HP/A:


1. Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to
open the NE Properties
window.
3. The NE Properties
window will appear. Click
on the IP Restriction
category to display the IP
Restriction parameters.
4. To preset/register IP
Addresses, use the
Add/Modify/Remove
buttons under Restricted
IP Address for top
subnet. (If no IP
addresses need to be
preset, simply proceed to
the next step).
5. Under Default Gateway
for the Root NE (Bridge),
input the IP Address of the
Default Gateway for the
Root NE (Bridge).

- 145 -

NWD-104045
2.9.22 Setting NE Properties of 5000S
2.9.22.1 To set or modify the NE properties of 5000S:

1.

Right click on the selected


NE to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)

2.

Click on Properties in the


context menu to open the NE Properties window.

3.

The NE Properties window will appear. The default is the General category window, which
shows the current configuration.

4.

In this window, NE Name, CTRL Type, Branch NE Type, NE Name Position, and Antenna
Direction can be changed. The definitions of these parameters are listed in Table 2.59.

Table 2.59 General Parameters of 5000S


Parameter
System

CTRL Type

Position/
Direction

Equipment Type
Network Element
Name
CTRL Type
Branch NE Type
Name Position
Antenna
Direction

Port Information

Definition
The type of equipment: 5000S
The name of the NE in the network. Maximum number of
characters possible is 32.
Role of the CTRL in the network. Root NE, Root NE (Bridge),
Branch NE or Normal NE.
The number of Branch NEs: None, 2, or 3 branches.
The position of the text in the workspace can be customized
here.
The antenna icon in the workspace can be customized to face
either Right or Left.
This provides the IP information of the available port in the
selected NE. The IP address that the port uses and its subnet
mask can be viewed in this section.

- 146 -

NWD-104045
2.9.22.2 Editing each Port Parameters of 5000S
The Port category displayed in the Network overview changes according to the type of CTRL and
Branch NE that is selected.
To change the respective Port Parameters for 5000S:
1. Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the respective Port category to display
the corresponding port information. (NOTE: EM2 (NE) Port, EM1 (NMS) Port)
a) Radio/EM2 Port
--- Root NE

b) Radio/EM2/EM1 Port (Bridge)


--- Normal NE, Root Branch NE (No branch)

Port category

Port category

c) EM2/EM1 Port / Radio Port


--- Branch NE (2Brances)

d) EM2 Port / Radio/EM1 Port


--- Branch NE (2Branches)

Port category

Port category

- 147 -

NWD-104045
e) Radio Port / EM2 Port / EM1 Port --- Branch NE (3Branches)

4. In this window, the IP Address for the respective port is defined. These parameters are
defined in Table 2.60.
NOTE: The IP addresses, Subnet Masks can only be manually set if selected in the Assign
IP Address manually or Assign Subnet Mask manually check box.
Table 2.60 Port Parameters for 5000S
Parameter
Assign IP Address manually
Assign Subnet Mask manually
Network

Primary
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Subnet Name

Definition
When Assign IP Address manually check box is selected,
user can modify IP Address.
When Assign Subnet Mask manually check box is
selected, user can modify Subnet Mask.
When the Primary check box of a port is selected, that
ports IP address becomes detectable by the PNMS.
IP address of the respective port.
Subnet mask of the respective port.
Defines the name of the respective port sub-network.

- 148 -

NWD-104045
2.9.22.3 Editing Async Parameters for 5000S
Whenever a 5000S is connected via Async to another device (whether it is another 5000S or
not), the Async category is displayed in the Network overview.
To change the Async Parameters of 5000S:

1. Right click on the selected


NE to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the NE
Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the Async category to display the Async
port information.
4. In this window, the IP Address of the Async port is defined. The definitions of these
parameters are listed in Table 2.61.
Table 2.61 Async Parameters for 5000S
Parameter
Common

Data Link

HDLC

IP Address
Subnet Mask
Speed
Mode
Terminal Auto
Assign
Terminate

Definition
Type of data link protocol used by Async. This is always set at
HDLC when connected in multi-drop with another NE. The
data link will be set to PPP when connected to a PASOLINK
V3/PASOLINK V4/MIU CPMC.
IP address of Async port.
Subnet mask of Async port.
Speed of Async port.
Specifies if the Async port is used in HDLC. The Async port
can either be Master, Slave or blank.
Automatically allow the NetCfgToolj to terminate the HDLC
connection of the selected NEs Async port, if it is the last port
in the HDLC line. (Recommended)
If Terminal Auto Assign is set to Manual, the Async port
termination can be set to On or Off.

- 149 -

NWD-104045
2.9.22.4 Editing PNMS (EM1) Parameters (for Root NE only) of 5000S
When Root NE is selected as the CTRL Type, the PNMS (EM1) category is displayed in the
Network overview.
To change the PNMS (EM1) Parameters:
1. Right click on the selected NE
to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the NE
Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window
will appear. Click on the
PNMS (EM1) category to
display the PNMS (EM1)
parameters.
4. In this window, the IP Address
and subnet mask and default
gateway information of the
PNMS (EM1) port are defined.
The definitions of these
parameters are listed in Table
2.62.
Table 2.62 PNMS (EM1) Parameters for 5000S
Parameter
LAN

Default
Gateway

IP Address

Subnet Mask
IP Address

Definition
The IP address defines the usage by the IDU EM1 (NMS)
port. However, it is only used when the EM1 (NMS) port is
used for connecting to the PNMS.
IP address. This is only set if the selected NE is a Root NE.
Subnet mask of above mentioned EM1 (NMS) port.
Default Gateway of above mentioned EM1 (NMS) port.
Normally the IP address of the PNMS PC / Workstation or the
router associated with the PNMS.

- 150 -

NWD-104045
2.9.22.5 Editing Routing Parameters of 5000S
To indicate the Routing Parameters of 5000S:
1. Right click on the selected
NE to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to open
the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window
will appear. Click on the
Routing category to display
the routing parameters.
4. The IP address of the
Default Gateway can be
indicated via this window.
The Default Gateway IP
address of Root NE is
normally the IP address of
the PNMS PC / Workstation
or the router associated with the PNMS. The first subnet IP address is automatically set as
the Default Gateway IP address for Branch/ Normal NEs.

- 151 -

NWD-104045
2.9.22.6 Editing SNTP Parameters for 5000S
Each NE support Simple Network Time Protocol, used to synchronize its internal clock to a
defined Time-server in the network.
To change the SNTP Parameters of 5000S:
1. Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the SNTP category to display the SNTP
parameters.

a) Root NE, Root NE (Bridge)

b) Other

4. The Time Synchronization mode can be set in this window. The time on the CTRL module
can either be synchronized to a time-server with SNTP in the network or set to None (no
time synchronization). The IP address of the time-server as well as the Refresh Interval
(the time in seconds that elapses before the NE will try to synchronize its internal clock to
a specified time-server) can be set in this window.
NOTE: Please reenter the correct SNTP IP Address, when the CTRL Type in the General
category window is changed from Root NE to Root NE (Bridge) or vice- versa.

- 152 -

NWD-104045
2.9.22.7 Editing IP Restriction Parameters (for Root NE [Bridge] only) of 5000S
In network configurations where the Subnet is not supposed to be disconnected at the Root NE,
IP addresses can be preset for devices connected ahead of the Root NE in the IP Restriction
Category window (for instance: IP addresses for the PNMS computer or the router). When
configuring (Create Configuration) with NetCfgToolj, IP addresses (apart from any preregistered
ones) are automatically assigned to other devices. When Root NE (Bridge) is selected as the
CTRL Type, the IP Restriction category is displayed in the Network overview.

No.01

PNMS

Root NE
(Bridge)

No.02

Normal NE

No.03

Normal NE

No.04

Normal NE
Subnet

No.01

PNMS

Router

Root NE
(Bridge)

No.02

Normal NE

No.03

Normal NE

No.04

Normal NE

To set the IP Restriction Parameters of 5000S:


1. Right click on the selected
NE to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to open
the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window
will appear. Click on the IP
Restriction category to
display the IP Restriction
parameters.
4. To preset/register IP
Addresses, use the
Add/Modify/Remove
buttons under Restricted IP
Address for top subnet. (If
no IP addresses need to be
preset, simply proceed to the next step).
5. Under Default Gateway for the Root NE (Bridge), input the IP Address of the Default
Gateway for the Root NE (Bridge).

- 153 -

NWD-104045
2.9.23 Setting NE Properties of 5000S (1NE)
2.9.23.1 To set or modify the NE properties of 5000S (1NE):

1.

Right click on the selected NE


to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)

2.

Click on Properties in the


context menu to open the NE Properties window.

3.

The NE Properties window will appear. The default is the General category window, which
shows the current configuration.

4.

In this window, Equipment Type, NE Name, CTRL Type, Branch NE Type, NE Name Position,
and Antenna Direction can be changed. The definitions of these parameters are listed in
Table 2.63.
Table 2.63 General Parameters of 5000S (1NE)

Parameter
System

Equipment Type

CTRL Type

Network Element
Name
CTRL Type
Branch NE Type

Position/
Direction

Name Position
Antenna
Direction

Port Information

Definition
The type of equipment: 5000S (Terminal), 5000S
(2xTerminal) and 5000S (Repeater).
The name of the NE in the network. Maximum number of
characters possible is 32.
Role of the CTRL in the network. Root NE, Root NE (Bridge),
Branch NE or Normal NE.
The number of Branch NEs for 5000S (2xTerminal) and
5000S (Repeater): None, 2, 3 or 4 branches.
The number of Branch NEs for 5000S (Terminal): None, 2 or
3 branches.
The position of the text in the workspace can be customized
here.
The antenna icon in the workspace can be customized to face
either Right or Left.
This provides the IP information of the available port in the
selected NE. The IP address that the port uses and its subnet
mask can be viewed in this section.

- 154 -

NWD-104045
2.9.23.2 Editing each Port Parameters of 5000S (1NE)
The Port category displayed in the Network overview changes according to the type of CTRL and
Branch NE that is selected.
To change the respective Port Parameters for 5000S (1NE):
1. Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the respective Port category to display
the corresponding port information. (NOTE: EM2 (NE) Port, EM1 (NMS) Port)
<5000S (2xTerminal)>
a) EAST/WEST/EM2 Port
--- Root NE

b) EAST/WEST/EM2/EM1 Port
--- Root NE (Bridge), Normal NE, Branch NE (No Branch)

Port category

Port category

c) EAST Port / WEST/EM2/EM1 Port


--- Branch NE (2Brances)

Port category

- 155 -

NWD-104045
d) EAST Port / WEST Port / EM2/EM1 Port
--- Branch NE (3Branches)

Port category

e) EAST Port/ WEST Port / EM2 Port / EM1 Port


--- Branch NE (4Branches)

Port category

- 156 -

NWD-104045
<5000S (Repeater)>
a) DIR-A/DIR-B/EM2 Port
--- Root NE

b) DIR-A/DIR-B/EM2/EM1 Port
--- Root NE (Bridge), Normal NE, Branch NE (No Branch)

Port category

Port category

c) DIR-A Port / DIR-B/EM2/EM1 Port


--- Branch NE (2Brances)

Port category

d) DIR-A Port / DIR-B Port / EM2/EM1 Port


--- Branch NE (3Branches)

Port category

e) DIR-A Port/ DIR-B Port / EM2 Port / EM1 Port


--- Branch NE (4Branches)

Port category

- 157 -

NWD-104045
<5000S (Terminal)>
a) Radio/EM2 Port
--- Root NE

b) Radio/EM2/EM1 Port
--- Root NE (Bridge), Normal NE, Branch NE
(No branch)

Port category

Port category

c) EM2/EM1 Port / Radio Port


--- Branch NE (2Brances)

d) Radio Port / EM2 Port / EM1 Port


--- Branch NE (3Branches)

Port category

Port category

- 158 -

NWD-104045
4. In this window, the IP Address for the respective port is defined. These parameters are
defined in Table 2.64.
NOTE: The IP addresses, Subnet Masks can only be manually set if selected in the Assign
IP Address manually or Assign Subnet Mask manually check box.
Table 2.64 Port Parameters for 5000S (1NE)
Parameter
Assign IP Address manually
Assign Subnet Mask manually
Network

Primary
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Subnet Name

Definition
When Assign IP Address manually check box is selected,
user can modify IP Address.
When Assign Subnet Mask manually check box is
selected, user can modify Subnet Mask.
When the Primary check box of a port is selected, that
ports IP address becomes detectable by the PNMS.
IP address of the respective port.
Subnet mask of the respective port.
Defines the name of the respective port sub-network.

- 159 -

NWD-104045
2.9.23.3 Editing Async Parameters for 5000S (1NE)
Whenever a 5000S is connected via Async to another device (whether it is another 5000S or
not), the Async category is displayed in the Network overview.
To change the Async Parameters of 5000S:

1. Right click on the selected


NE to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the
NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the Async category to display the Async
port information.
4. In this window, the IP Address of the Async port is defined. The definitions of these
parameters are listed in Table 2.65.
Table 2.65 Async Parameters for 5000S (1NE)
Parameter
Common

Data Link

HDLC

IP Address
Subnet Mask
Speed
Mode
Terminal Auto
Assign
Terminate

Definition
Type of data link protocol used by Async. This is always set at
HDLC when connected in multi-drop with another NE. The
data link will be set to PPP when connected to a PASOLINK
V3/PASOLINK V4/MIU CPMC.
IP address of Async port.
Subnet mask of Async port.
Speed of Async port.
Specifies if the Async port is used in HDLC. The Async port
can either be Master, Slave or blank.
Automatically allow the NetCfgToolj to terminate the HDLC
connection of the selected NEs Async port, if it is the last port
in the HDLC line. (Recommended)
If Terminal Auto Assign is set to Manual, the Async port
termination can be set to On or Off.

- 160 -

NWD-104045
2.9.23.4 Editing PNMS (EM1) Parameters (for Root NE only) of 5000S (1NE)
When Root NE is selected as the CTRL Type, the PNMS (EM1) category is displayed in the
Network overview.
To change the PNMS (EM1) Parameters:
1. Right click on the selected NE
to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the NE
Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window
will appear. Click on the
PNMS (EM1) category to
display the PNMS (EM1)
parameters.
4. In this window, the IP Address
and subnet mask and default
gateway information of the
PNMS (EM1) port are defined.
The definitions of these
parameters are listed in Table
2.66.
Table 2.66 PNMS (EM1) Parameters for 5000S (1NE)
Parameter
NMS

IP Address

Subnet Mask
Default
Gateway

Definition
The IP address defines the usage by the IDU EM1 (NMS)
port. However, it is only used when the EM1 (NMS) port is
used for connecting to the PNMS.
IP address. This is only set if the selected NE is a Root NE.
Subnet mask of above mentioned EM1 (NMS) port.
Default Gateway of above mentioned EM1 (NMS) port.
Normally the IP address of the PNMS PC / Workstation or the
router associated with the PNMS.

- 161 -

NWD-104045
2.9.23.5 Editing Routing Parameters of 5000S (1NE)
To indicate the Routing Parameters of 5000S:
1. Right click on the selected
NE to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to open
the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window
will appear. Click on the
Routing category to display
the routing parameters.
4. The IP address of the
Default Gateway can be
indicated via this window.
The Default Gateway IP
address of Root NE is
normally the IP address of
the PNMS PC / Workstation
or the router associated with the PNMS. The first subnet IP address is automatically set as
the Default Gateway IP address for Branch /Normal NEs.

- 162 -

NWD-104045
2.9.23.6 Editing SNTP Parameters for 5000S (1NE)
Each NE support Simple Network Time Protocol, used to synchronize its internal clock to a
defined Time-server in the network.
To change the SNTP Parameters of 5000S:
1. Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the SNTP category to display the SNTP
parameters.
a) Root NE, Root NE (Bridge)

b) Other

4. The Time Synchronization mode can be set in this window. The time on the CTRL module
can either be synchronized to a time-server with SNTP in the network or set to None (no
time synchronization). The IP address of the time-server as well as the Refresh Interval
(the time in seconds that elapses before the NE will try to synchronize its internal clock to
a specified time-server) can be set in this window.
NOTE: Please reenter the correct SNTP IP Address, when the CTRL Type in the General
category window is changed from Root NE to Root NE (Bridge) or vice- versa.

- 163 -

NWD-104045
2.9.23.7 Editing IP Restriction Parameters (for Root NE [Bridge] only) of 5000S (1NE)
In network configurations where the Subnet is not supposed to be disconnected at the Root NE,
IP addresses can be preset for devices connected ahead of the Root NE in the IP Restriction
Category window (for instance: IP addresses for the PNMS computer or the router). When
configuring (Create Configuration) with NetCfgToolj, IP addresses (apart from any preregistered
ones) are automatically assigned to other devices. When Root NE (Bridge) is selected as the
CTRL Type, the IP Restriction category is displayed in the Network overview.

No.01

PNMS

Root NE
(Bridge)

No.02

Normal NE

No.03

Normal NE

No.04

Normal NE
Subnet

No.01

Router

Root NE
(Bridge)

No.02

Normal NE

No.03

Normal NE

No.04

Normal NE

To set the IP Restriction Parameters of 5000S:


1. Right click on the selected
NE to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to open
the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window
will appear. Click on the IP
Restriction category to
display the IP Restriction
parameters.
4. To preset/register IP
Addresses, use the
Add/Modify/Remove
buttons under Restricted IP
Address for top subnet. (If
no IP addresses need to be
preset, simply proceed to the next step).
5. Under Default Gateway for the Root NE (Bridge), input the IP Address of the Default
Gateway for the Root NE (Bridge).

- 164 -

NWD-104045
2.9.24 Setting NE Properties of iPASOLINK 200
2.9.24.1 To set or modify the NE properties of iPASOLINK 200:

1.

Right click on the selected


NE to display the context
menu. (Or double click on
the selected NE to open the
NE Properties window.)

2.

Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NE Properties window.

3.

The NE Properties window will appear. The default is the General category window, which
shows the current configuration.

4.

In this window, NE Type, Branch NE Type, Branch Setting, IP Address, Subnet Mask, Subnet
Name, NE Name, Area Name, Note, NE Name Position, and Line Direction can be changed.
The definitions of these parameters are listed in Table 2.67.
Table 2.67 General Parameters of iPASOLINK 200

Parameter
System

Network Setting

NE Name Setting

Equipment Type
NE Type
Branch NE Type
Port
Branch Setting
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Subnet Name
Network Element
Name
Area Name
Note

Position/Direction

Name Position
Line Direction

Definition
The type of equipment: iPASOLINK 200.
Role of the CTRL in the network. Root NE, Root NE
(Bridge), Branch NE or Normal NE.
The number of Branch NEs: None, 2-7branches.
This provides the available ports in the selected NE.
The branch setting of port: Bridge No.1-No.7.
IP address of the respective port.
Subnet mask of the respective port.
Defines the name of the respective port sub-network.
The name of the NE in the network. Maximum number of
characters possible is 32.
The area where the NE is located (optional). Maximum
number of characters possible is 32.
Additional description, or remarks on the NE (optional).
Maximum number of characters possible is 100.
The position of the text in the workspace can be customized
here.
The direction of the line in the workspace can be
customized here.

- 165 -

NWD-104045
2.9.24.2 Editing Inband Parameters of iPASOLINK 200
To change the Inband Parameters:
1. Right click on the
selected NE to display
the context menu. (Or
double click on the
selected NE to open
the NE Properties
window.)
2. Click on Properties in
the context menu to
open the NE
Properties window.
3. The NE Properties
window will appear.
Click on the Inband
Management category
to display the Inband
parameters.
4. In this window, Port
Setting, Branch Setting,
IP Address, Subnet
Mask, Subnet Name
can be changed. The definitions of these parameters are listed in Table 2.68.
Table 2.68 Inband Parameters for iPASOLINK 200
Parameter
Network Setting

Port Setting
Port
Branch Setting
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Subnet Name

Definition
To choose the number of available inband ports: Not Used, 1
port, 2 ports, 3 ports or 4 ports.
This provides the whole inband ports in the selected NE.
The branch setting of port: Bridge No.1-No.7
IP address of the respective port.
Subnet mask of the respective port.
Defines the name of the respective port sub-network.

- 166 -

NWD-104045
2.9.24.3 Editing Async Parameters for iPASOLINK 200
Whenever iPASOLINK 200 is connected via Async to another device, the Async category is
displayed in the Network overview.
To change the Async Parameters of iPASOLINK 200:

1. Right click on the selected NE


to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the NE2 category to display the Async port
information.
4. In this window, the IP Address of the Async port is defined. The definitions of these
parameters are listed in Table 2.69.
Table 2.69 Async Parameters for iPASOLINK 200
Parameter
Common

Data Link
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Speed

Definition
The data link will be set to PPP when connected to a
PASOLINK V3/PASOLINK V4/MIU CPMC.
IP address of Async port.
Subnet mask of Async port.
Speed of Async port.

- 167 -

NWD-104045
2.9.24.4 Editing PNMS (NMS) Parameters (for Root NE only) of iPASOLINK 200
When Root NE is selected as the NE Type, the PNMS (NMS) category is displayed in the
Network overview.
To change the PNMS (NMS) Parameters:
1. Right click on the
selected NE to display
the context menu.
(Or double click on
the selected NE to
open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in
the context menu to
open the NE
Properties window.
3. The NE Properties
window will appear.
Click on the PNMS
(NMS) category to
display the PNMS
(NMS) parameters.
4. In this window, the IP
Address and subnet
mask and default
gateway information of
the PNMS (NMS) port
are defined. The definitions of these parameters are listed in Table 2.70.

Table 2.70 PNMS (NMS) Parameters for iPASOLINK 200


Parameter
PNMS Connection

LAN

IP Address

Subnet Mask
Default Gateway

Definition
Defines the type of connection to the PNMS used by the Root
NE. The Root NE can connect to the PNMS PC by LAN (IP)
connection.
The IP address defines that it is used by the IDU LAN port.
However, it is only used when the LAN port is used for
connecting the PNMS.
IP address of LAN port of the NE. This is only set if the
selected NE is a Root NE.
Subnet Mask of abovementioned LAN port.
Default Gateway of above mentioned NMS port.
Normally the IP address of the PNMS PC / Workstation or the
router associated with the PNMS.

- 168 -

NWD-104045
2.9.24.5 Editing Routing Parameters of iPASOLINK 200
To indicate the Routing Parameters of iPASOLINK 200:
1. Right click on the
selected NE to display
the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the
NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to
open the NE Properties
window.
3. The NE Properties
window will appear. Click
on the Routing category
to display the routing
parameters.
4. The IP address of the
Default Gateway can be
indicated via this window.
The Default Gateway IP
address of Root NE is
normally the IP address
of the PNMS PC /
Workstation or the router associated with the PNMS. The first subnet IP address is
automatically set as the Default Gateway IP address for Branch/ Normal NEs.

- 169 -

NWD-104045
2.9.24.6 Editing IP Restriction Parameters (for Root NE [Bridge] only) of iPASOLINK 200
In network configurations where the Subnet is not supposed to be disconnected at the Root NE,
IP addresses can be preset for devices connected ahead of the Root NE in the IP Restriction
Category window (for instance: IP addresses for the PNMS computer or the router). When
configuring (Create Configuration) with NetCfgToolj, IP addresses (apart from any preregistered
ones) are automatically assigned to other devices. When Root NE (Bridge) is selected as the
CTRL Type, the IP Restriction category is displayed in the Network overview.

No.01

PNMS

Root NE
(Bridge)

No.02

Normal NE

No.03

No.04

Normal NE

Normal NE
Subnet

No.01

PNMS

Router

Root NE
(Bridge)

No.02

Normal NE

No.03

Normal NE

No.04

Normal NE

To set the IP Restriction Parameters of iPASOLINK 200:


1. Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the IP Restriction category to display the
IP Restriction parameters.
4. To preset/register IP Addresses, use the Add/Modify/Remove buttons under Restricted
IP Address for top subnet. (If no IP addresses need to be preset, simply proceed to the
next step).
5. Under Default Gateway for the Root NE (Bridge), input the IP Address of the Default
Gateway for the Root NE (Bridge).

- 170 -

NWD-104045
2.9.24.7 Editing NTP Parameters of iPASOLINK 200
This function allows for the individual setting of the NTP parameters for the iPASOLINK NE. In
case you need to set the NTP parameters individually, you may use this menu. Otherwise please
use the Tools Settings Bundle NTP Setting... from main menu.
To change the NTP Parameters:
1. Right click on the selected
NE to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the
NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the
NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties
window will appear. Click
on the NTP category to
display the NTP
parameters.
4. In this window, the NTP
Setting and NTP Server
Address Setting
information of the NTP
are defined. The
definitions of these
parameters are listed in
Table 2.71.

Table 2.71 NTP Parameters for iPASOLINK 200


Parameter
NTP Setting

NTP
NTP Server Mode
NTP Client Mode
Stratum
Multicast Port
Multicast Interval

NTP Server
Address Setting

IP Address1~4
NTP Version1~4

Definition
NTP status: Enable or Disable.
Mode of NTP Server: Unicast or Multicast.
Mode of NTP Client: Unicast or Multicast.
stratum levels define the distance from the reference clock:
Default value is 15.
Multicast Port of NTP: Default value is Bridge-1.
Multicast Interval of NTP: Default value is
18[h]12[min]16[s](65536[s]).
NTP Server IP Address.
NTP Server Version: 3 or 4.

- 171 -

NWD-104045

Poll Time1~4

Interval of NTP Server:


16[s]
32[s]
1[min]4[s](64[s])
2[min]8[s](128[s])
4[min]16[s](256[s])
8[min]32[s](512[s])
17[min]4[s](1024[s])
34[min]8[s](2048[s])
1[h]8[min]16[s](4096[s])
2[h]16[min]32[s](8192[s])
4[h]33[min]4[s](16384[s])
9[h]6[min]8[s](32768[s])
18[h]12[min]16[s](65536[s])
36[h]24[min]32[s](131072[s])

- 172 -

NWD-104045
2.9.25 Setting NE Properties of iPASOLINK 200 (1NE)
2.9.25.1 To set or modify the NE properties of iPASOLINK 200 (1NE):

1.

Right click on the selected NE to


display the context menu. (Or
double click on the selected NE to
open the NE Properties window.)

2.

Click on Properties in the context


menu to open the NE Properties
window.

3.

The NE Properties window will appear. The default is the General category window, which
shows the current configuration.
In this window, Equipment Type, NE Type, Branch NE Type, Branch Setting, IP Address,
Subnet Mask, Subnet Name, NE Name, Area Name, Note, NE Name Position, and Line
Direction can be changed. The definitions of these parameters are listed in Table 2.72.
Table 2.72 General Parameters of iPASOLINK 200 (1NE)

Parameter
System

Equipment Type
NE Type

Network Setting

NE Name Setting

Branch NE Type
Port
Branch Setting
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Subnet Name
Network Element
Name
Area Name
Note

Position/
Direction

Name Position
Line Direction

Definition
The type of equipment: iPASOLINK 200 (2-WAY) and
iPASOLINK 200 (Terminal).
Role of the CTRL in the network. Root NE, Root NE
(Bridge), Branch NE or Normal NE.
The number of Branch NEs: None, 2-8branches.
This provides the available ports in the selected NE.
The branch setting of port: Bridge No.1-No.8.
IP address of the respective port.
Subnet mask of the respective port.
Defines the name of the respective port sub-network.
The name of the NE in the network. Maximum number of
characters possible is 32.
The area where the NE is located (optional). Maximum
number of characters possible is 32.
Additional description, or remarks on the NE (optional).
Maximum number of characters possible is 100.
The position of the text in the workspace can be customized
here.
The direction of the line in the workspace can be
customized here.

- 173 -

NWD-104045
2.9.25.2 Editing Inband Parameters of iPASOLINK 200(1NE)
To change the Inband Parameters:
1. Right click on the selected
NE to display the context
menu. (Or double click on
the selected NE to open
the NE Properties
window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the
NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties
window will appear. Click
on the Inband
Management category to
display the Inband
parameters.
4. In this window, Port
Setting, Branch Setting,
IP Address, Subnet Mask,
Subnet Name can be
changed. The definitions
of these parameters are listed in Table 2.73.
Table 2.73 Inband Parameters for iPASOLINK 200(1NE)
Parameter
Network Setting

Port Setting
Port
Branch Setting
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Subnet Name

Definition
To choose the number of available inband ports: Not Used, 1
port, 2 ports, 3 ports or 4 ports.
This provides the whole inband ports in the selected NE.
The branch setting of port: Bridge No.1-No.8
IP address of the respective port.
Subnet mask of the respective port.
Defines the name of the respective port sub-network.

- 174 -

NWD-104045
2.9.25.3 Editing Async Parameters for iPASOLINK 200 (1NE)
Whenever an iPASOLINK 200 is connected via Async to another device, the Async category is
displayed in the Network overview.
To change the Async Parameters of iPASOLINK 200 (1NE):

1. Right click on the


selected NE to display the
context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the
NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the Async category to display the Async
port information.
4. In this window, the IP Address of the Async port is defined. The definitions of these
parameters are listed in Table 2.74.
Table 2.74 Async Parameters for iPASOLINK 200 (1NE)
Parameter
Common

Data Link
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Speed

Definition
The data link will be set to PPP when connected to a
PASOLINK V3/PASOLINK V4/MIU CPMC.
IP address of Async port.
Subnet mask of Async port.
Speed of Async port.

- 175 -

NWD-104045
2.9.25.4 Editing PNMS (NMS) Parameters (for Root NE only) of iPASOLINK 200 (1NE)
When Root NE is selected as the NE Type, the PNMS (NMS) category is displayed in the
Network overview.
To change the PNMS (NMS) Parameters:
1. Right click on the selected
NE to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the
NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the
NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties
window will appear. Click
on the PNMS (NMS)
category to display the
PNMS (NMS)
parameters.
4. In this window, the IP
Address and subnet
mask and default
gateway information of
the PNMS (NMS) port are
defined. The definitions of
these parameters are listed in Table 2.75.

Table 2.75 PNMS (NMS) Parameters for iPASOLINK 200 (1NE)


Parameter
PNMS Connection

LAN

IP Address

Subnet Mask
Default Gateway

Definition
Defines the type of connection to the PNMS used by the Root
NE. The Root NE can connect to the PNMS PC by LAN (IP)
connection.
The IP address defines that it is used by the IDU LAN port.
However, it is only used when the LAN port is used for
connecting the PNMS.
IP address of LAN port of the NE. This is only set if the
selected NE is a Root NE.
Subnet mask of abovementioned LAN port.
Default Gateway of above mentioned NMS port.
Normally the IP address of the PNMS PC / Workstation or the
router associated with the PNMS.

- 176 -

NWD-104045
2.9.25.5 Editing Routing Parameters of iPASOLINK 200 (1NE)
To indicate the Routing Parameters of iPASOLINK 200 (1NE):
1. Right click on the
selected NE to display
the context menu.
(Or double click on
the selected NE to
open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to
open the NE
Properties window.
3. The NE Properties
window will appear.
Click on the Routing
category to display the
routing parameters.
4. The IP address of the
Default Gateway can
be indicated via this
window. The Default
Gateway IP address of
Root NE is normally
the IP address of the PNMS PC / Workstation or the router associated with the PNMS. The
first subnet IP address is automatically set as the Default Gateway IP address for Branch
/Normal NEs.

- 177 -

NWD-104045
2.9.25.6 Editing IP Restriction Parameters (for Root NE [Bridge] only) of iPASOLINK 200 (1NE)
In network configurations where the Subnet is not supposed to be disconnected at the Root NE,
IP addresses can be preset for devices connected ahead of the Root NE in the IP Restriction
Category window (for instance: IP addresses for the PNMS computer or the router). When
configuring (Create Configuration) with NetCfgToolj, IP addresses (apart from any preregistered
ones) are automatically assigned to other devices. When Root NE (Bridge) is selected as the
CTRL Type, the IP Restriction category is displayed in the Network overview.

No.01

PNMS

Root NE
(Bridge)

No.02

Normal NE

No.03

No.04

Normal NE

Normal NE
Subnet

No.01

Router

Root NE
(Bridge)

No.02

Normal NE

No.03

Normal NE

No.04

Normal NE

To set the IP Restriction Parameters of iPASOLINK 200 (1NE):


1. Right click on the selected
NE to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to open
the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window
will appear. Click on the IP
Restriction category to
display the IP Restriction
parameters.
4. To preset/register IP
Addresses, use the
Add/Modify/Remove
buttons under Restricted IP
Address for top subnet.
(If no IP addresses need to
be preset, simply proceed to
the next step).
5. Under Default Gateway for the Root NE (Bridge), input the IP Address of the Default
Gateway for the Root NE (Bridge).

- 178 -

NWD-104045
2.9.25.7 Editing NTP Parameters of iPASOLINK 200(1NE)
This function allows for the individual setting of the NTP parameters for the iPASOLINK NE. In
case you need to set the NTP parameters individually, you may use this menu. Otherwise please
use the Tools Settings Bundle NTP Setting... from main menu.
To change the NTP Parameters:
1. Right click on the selected
NE to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the
NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the
NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties
window will appear. Click
on the NTP category to
display the NTP
parameters.
4. In this window, the NTP
Setting and NTP Server
Address Setting
information of the NTP are
defined. The definitions of
these parameters are
listed in Table 2.76.

Parameter
NTP Setting

NTP Server
Address Setting

Table 2.76 NTP Parameters for iPASOLINK 200(1NE)


Definition
NTP
NTP status: Enable or Disable.
NTP Server Mode Mode of NTP Server: Unicast or Multicast.
NTP Client Mode Mode of NTP Client: Unicast or Multicast.
Stratum
stratum levels define the distance from the reference clock:
Default value is 15.
Multicast Port
Multicast Port of NTP: Default value is Bridge-1.
Multicast Interval Multicast Interval of NTP : Default value is
18[h]12[min]16[s](65536[s]).
IP Address1~4
NTP Server IP Address.
NTP Version1~4
NTP Server Version: 3 or 4.

- 179 -

NWD-104045
Poll Time1~4

Interval of NTP Server:


16[s]
32[s]
1[min]4[s](64[s])
2[min]8[s](128[s])
4[min]16[s](256[s])
8[min]32[s](512[s])
17[min]4[s](1024[s])
34[min]8[s](2048[s])
1[h]8[min]16[s](4096[s])
2[h]16[min]32[s](8192[s])
4[h]33[min]4[s](16384[s])
9[h]6[min]8[s](32768[s])
18[h]12[min]16[s](65536[s])
36[h]24[min]32[s](131072[s])

- 180 -

NWD-104045
2.9.26 Setting NE Properties of iPASOLINK 400
2.9.26.1 To set or modify the NE properties of iPASOLINK 400:

1.

Right click on the selected


NE to display the context
menu. (Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)

2.

Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NE Properties window.

3.

The NE Properties window will appear. The default is the General category window, which
shows the current configuration.

4.

In this window, NE Type, Branch NE Type, Switch Group, available Ports, Branch Setting, IP
Address, Subnet Mask, Subnet Name, NE Name, Area Name, Note, NE Name Position, and
Line Direction can be changed. The definitions of these parameters are listed in Table 2.77.
Table 2.77 General Parameters of iPASOLINK 400

Parameter
System

Network Setting

NE Name Setting

Equipment Type
NE Type
Branch NE Type
Switch Group
Port
Branch Setting
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Subnet Name
Network Element
Name
Area Name
Note

Position/Direction

Name Position
Line Direction

Definition
The type of equipment: iPASOLINK 400.
Role of the CTRL in the network. Root NE, Root NE
(Bridge), Branch NE or Normal NE.
The number of Branch NEs: None, 2-7branches.
The type of switch group: 1+0, 1+1/1+0 XPIC or 1+1 XPIC.
This provides the available ports in the selected NE. Any
available ports can be selected except NMS port.
The branch setting of port: Bridge No.1-No.7.
IP address of the respective port.
Subnet mask of the respective port.
Defines the name of the respective port sub-network.
The name of the NE in the network. Maximum number of
characters possible is 32.
The area where the NE is located (optional). Maximum
number of characters possible is 32.
Additional description, or remarks on the NE (optional).
Maximum number of characters possible is 100.
The position of the text in the workspace can be customized
here.
The direction of the line in the workspace can be
customized here.

- 181 -

NWD-104045
2.9.26.2 Editing Inband Parameters of iPASOLINK 400
To change the Inband Parameters:
1. Right click on the
selected NE to display
the context menu. (Or
double click on the
selected NE to open the
NE Properties
window.)
2. Click on Properties in
the context menu to
open the NE
Properties window.
3. The NE Properties
window will appear.
Click on the Inband
Management category
to display the Inband
parameters.
4. In this window, Port Setting, Branch Setting, IP Address, Subnet Mask, Subnet Name can
be changed. The definitions of these parameters are listed in Table 2.78.
Table 2.78 Inband Parameters for iPASOLINK 400
Parameter
Network Setting

Port Setting
Port
Branch Setting
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Subnet Name

Definition
To choose the number of available inband ports: Not Used, 1
port, 2 ports, 3 ports or 4 ports.
This provides the whole inband ports in the selected NE.
The branch setting of port: Bridge No.1-No.7
IP address of the respective port.
Subnet mask of the respective port.
Defines the name of the respective port sub-network.

- 182 -

NWD-104045
2.9.26.3 Editing Async Parameters for iPASOLINK 400
Whenever an iPASOLINK 400 is connected via Async to another device, the Async category is
displayed in the Network overview.
To change the Async Parameters of iPASOLINK 400:

1. Right click on the selected


NE to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NE Properties window.

3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the NE2 category to display the Async
port information.
4. In this window, the IP Address of the Async port is defined. The definitions of these
parameters are listed in Table 2.79.
Table 2.79 Async Parameters for iPASOLINK 400
Parameter
Common

Data Link
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Speed

Definition
The data link will be set to PPP when connected to a
PASOLINK V3/PASOLINK V4/MIU CPMC.
IP address of Async port.
Subnet mask of Async port.
Speed of Async port.

- 183 -

NWD-104045
2.9.26.4 Editing PNMS (NMS) Parameters (for Root NE only) of iPASOLINK 400
When Root NE is selected as the NE Type, the PNMS (NMS) category is displayed in the
Network.overview.
To change the PNMS (NMS) Parameters:
1. Right click on the selected
NE to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the
NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the
NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window
will appear. Click on the
PNMS (NMS) category to
display the PNMS (NMS)
parameters.
4. In this window, the IP
Address and subnet mask
and default gateway
information of the PNMS
(NMS) port are defined. The definitions of these parameters are listed in Table 2.80.

Table 2.80 PNMS (NMS) Parameters for iPASOLINK 400


Parameter
PNMS Connection

LAN

IP Address

Subnet Mask
Default Gateway

Definition
Defines the type of connection to the PNMS used by the Root
NE. The Root NE can connect to the PNMS PC by LAN (IP)
connection.
The IP address defines that it is used by the IDU LAN port.
However, it is only used when the LAN port is used for
connecting the PNMS.
IP address of LAN port of the NE. This is only set if the
selected NE is a Root NE.
Subnet Mask of abovementioned LAN port.
Default Gateway of above mentioned NMS port.
Normally the IP address of the PNMS PC / Workstation or the
router associated with the PNMS.

- 184 -

NWD-104045
2.9.26.5 Editing Routing Parameters of iPASOLINK 400
To indicate the Routing Parameters of iPASOLINK 400:
1. Right click on the selected NE to
display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected
NE to open the NE Properties
window.)
2. Click on Properties to open the
NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will
appear. Click on the Routing
category to display the routing
parameters.
4. The IP address of the Default
Gateway can be indicated via this
window. The Default Gateway IP
address of Root NE is normally
the IP address of the PNMS PC /
Workstation or the router
associated with the PNMS. The
first subnet IP address is
automatically set as the Default Gateway IP address for Branch /Normal NEs.

- 185 -

NWD-104045
2.9.26.6 Editing IP Restriction Parameters (for Root NE [Bridge] only) of iPASOLINK 400
In network configurations where the Subnet is not supposed to be disconnected at the Root NE,
IP addresses can be preset for devices connected ahead of the Root NE in the IP Restriction
Category window (for instance: IP addresses for the PNMS computer or the router). When
configuring (Create Configuration) with NetCfgToolj, IP addresses (apart from any preregistered
ones) are automatically assigned to other devices. When Root NE (Bridge) is selected as the
CTRL Type, the IP Restriction category is displayed in the Network overview.

No.01

PNMS

Root NE
(Bridge)

No.02

Normal NE

No.03

No.04

Normal NE

Normal NE
Subnet

No.01

PNMS

Router

Root NE
(Bridge)

No.02

Normal NE

No.03

Normal NE

No.04

Normal NE

To set the IP Restriction Parameters of iPASOLINK 400:


1. Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the IP Restriction category to display the
IP Restriction parameters.
4. To preset/register IP Addresses, use the Add/Modify/Remove buttons under Restricted
IP Address for top subnet. (If no IP addresses need to be preset, simply proceed to the
next step).
5. Under Default Gateway for the Root NE (Bridge), input the IP Address of the Default
Gateway for the Root NE (Bridge).

- 186 -

NWD-104045
2.9.26.7 Editing NTP Parameters of iPASOLINK 400
This function allows for the individual setting of the NTP parameters for the iPASOLINK NE. In
case you need to set the NTP parameters individually, you may use this menu. Otherwise please
use the Tools Settings Bundle NTP Setting... from main menu.
To change the NTP Parameters:
1. Right click on the
selected NE to display
the context menu.
(Or double click on
the selected NE to
open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in
the context menu to
open the NE
Properties window.
3. The NE Properties
window will appear.
Click on the NTP
category to display the
NTP parameters.
4. In this window, the NTP
Setting and NTP
Server Address Setting
information of the NTP
are defined. The
definitions of these
parameters are listed
in Table 2.81.

Table 2.81 NTP Parameters for iPASOLINK 400


Parameter
NTP Setting

NTP
NTP Server Mode
NTP Client Mode
Stratum
Multicast Port
Multicast Interval

NTP Server
Address Setting

IP Address1~4
NTP Version1~4

Definition
NTP status: Enable or Disable.
Mode of NTP Server: Unicast or Multicast.
Mode of NTP Client: Unicast or Multicast.
stratum levels define the distance from the reference clock:
Default value is 15.
Multicast Port of NTP: Default value is Bridge-1.
Multicast Interval of NTP: Default value is
18[h]12[min]16[s](65536[s]).
NTP Server IP Address.
NTP Server Version: 3 or 4.

- 187 -

NWD-104045
Poll Time1~4

Interval of NTP Server:


16[s]
32[s]
1[min]4[s](64[s])
2[min]8[s](128[s])
4[min]16[s](256[s])
8[min]32[s](512[s])
17[min]4[s](1024[s])
34[min]8[s](2048[s])
1[h]8[min]16[s](4096[s])
2[h]16[min]32[s](8192[s])
4[h]33[min]4[s](16384[s])
9[h]6[min]8[s](32768[s])
18[h]12[min]16[s](65536[s])
36[h]24[min]32[s](131072[s])

- 188 -

NWD-104045
2.9.27 Setting NE Properties of iPASOLINK 400 (1NE)
2.9.27.1 To set or modify the NE properties of iPASOLINK 400 (1NE):

1.

Right click on the selected


NE to display the context
menu. (Or double click on
the selected NE to open the
NE Properties window.)

2.

Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NE Properties window.

3.

The NE Properties window will appear. The default is the General category window,
which shows the current configuration.

4.

In this window, Equipment Type, NE Type, Switch Group, available Ports, Branch NE
Type, Branch Setting, IP Address, Subnet Mask, Subnet Name, NE Name, Area Name,
Note, NE Name Position, and Line Direction can be changed. The definitions of these
parameters are listed in Table 2.82.
Table 2.82 General Parameters of iPASOLINK 400 (1NE)

Parameter
System

Network Setting

Equipment Type
NE Type
Branch NE Type
Switch Group
Port

NE Name Setting

Branch Setting
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Subnet Name
Network Element
Name
Area Name
Note

Position/
Direction

Name Position
Line Direction

Definition
The type of equipment: iPASOLINK 400.
Role of the CTRL in the network. Root NE, Root NE
(Bridge), Branch NE or Normal NE.
The number of Branch NEs: None, 2-10branches.
The type of switch group: 1+0, 1+1/1+0 XPIC, 1+1 XPIC or
1+0 XPIC(2Way)/1+1 XPIC(2Way).
This provides the available ports in the selected NE. Any
available ports can be selected except NMS port.
The branch setting of port: Bridge No.1-No.10.
IP address of the respective port.
Subnet mask of the respective port.
Defines the name of the respective port sub-network.
The name of the NE in the network. Maximum number of
characters possible is 32.
The area where the NE is located (optional). Maximum
number of characters possible is 32.
Additional description, or remarks on the NE (optional).
Maximum number of characters possible is 100.
The position of the text in the workspace can be customized
here.
The direction of the line in the workspace can be
customized here.

- 189 -

NWD-104045
2.9.27.2 Editing Inband Parameters of iPASOLINK 400(1NE)
To change the Inband Parameters:
1. Right click on the
selected NE to display
the context menu. (Or
double click on the
selected NE to open the
NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in
the context menu to
open the NE Properties
window.
3. The NE Properties
window will appear.
Click on the Inband
Management category
to display the Inband
parameters.
4. In this window, Port
Setting, Branch Setting, IP Address, Subnet Mask, Subnet Name can be changed. The
definitions of these parameters are listed in Table 2.83.
Table 2.83 Inband Parameters for iPASOLINK 400(1NE)
Parameter
Network Setting

Port Setting
Port
Branch Setting
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Subnet Name

Definition
To choose the number of available inband ports: Not Used, 1
port, 2 ports, 3 ports or 4 ports.
This provides the whole inband ports in the selected NE.
The branch setting of port: Bridge No.1-No.10
IP address of the respective port.
Subnet mask of the respective port.
Defines the name of the respective port sub-network.

- 190 -

NWD-104045
2.9.27.3 Editing Async Parameters for iPASOLINK 400 (1NE)
Whenever an iPASOLINK 400 is connected via Async to another device, the Async category is
displayed in the Network overview.
To change the Async Parameters of iPASOLINK 400 (1NE):

1. Right click on the selected NE


to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the Async category to display the Async
port information.
4. In this window, the IP Address of the Async port is defined. The definitions of these
parameters are listed in Table 2.84.
Table 2.84 Async Parameters for iPASOLINK 400 (1NE)
Parameter
Common

Data Link
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Speed

Definition
The data link will be set to PPP when connected to a
PASOLINK V3/PASOLINK V4/MIU CPMC.
IP address of Async port.
Subnet mask of Async port.
Speed of Async port.

- 191 -

NWD-104045
2.9.27.4 Editing PNMS (NMS) Parameters (for Root NE only) of iPASOLINK 400 (1NE)
When Root NE is selected as the NE Type, the PNMS (NMS) category is displayed in the
Network overview.
To change the PNMS (NMS) Parameters:
1. Right click on the selected
NE to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the
NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window
will appear. Click on the
PNMS (NMS) category to
display the PNMS (NMS)
parameters.
4. In this window, the IP
Address and subnet mask
and default gateway
information of the PNMS
(NMS) port are defined.
The definitions of these parameters are listed in Table 2.85.

Table 2.85 PNMS (NMS) Parameters for iPASOLINK 400 (1NE)


Parameter
PNMS Connection

LAN

IP Address

Subnet Mask
Default Gateway

Definition
Defines the type of connection to the PNMS used by the Root
NE. The Root NE can connect to the PNMS PC by LAN (IP)
connection.
The IP address defines that it is used by the IDU LAN port.
However, it is only used when the LAN port is used for
connecting the PNMS.
IP address of LAN port of the NE. This is only set if the
selected NE is a Root NE.
Subnet mask of abovementioned LAN port.
Default Gateway of above mentioned NMS port.
Normally the IP address of the PNMS PC / Workstation or the
router associated with the PNMS.

- 192 -

NWD-104045
2.9.27.5 Editing Routing Parameters of iPASOLINK 400 (1NE)
To indicate the Routing Parameters of iPASOLINK 400 (1NE):
1. Right click on the selected
NE to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the
NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to
open the NE Properties
window.
3. The NE Properties
window will appear. Click
on the Routing category
to display the routing
parameters.
4. The IP address of the
Default Gateway can be
indicated via this window.
The Default Gateway IP
address of Root NE is normally the IP address of the PNMS PC / Workstation or the router
associated with the PNMS. The first subnet IP address is automatically set as the Default
Gateway IP address for Branch /Normal NEs.

- 193 -

NWD-104045
2.9.27.6 Editing IP Restriction Parameters (for Root NE [Bridge] only) of iPASOLINK 400 (1NE)
In network configurations where the Subnet is not supposed to be disconnected at the Root NE,
IP addresses can be preset for devices connected ahead of the Root NE in the IP Restriction
Category window (for instance: IP addresses for the PNMS computer or the router). When
configuring (Create Configuration) with NetCfgToolj, IP addresses (apart from any preregistered
ones) are automatically assigned to other devices. When Root NE (Bridge) is selected as the
CTRL Type, the IP Restriction category is displayed in the Network overview.

No.01

PNMS

Root NE
(Bridge)

No.02

Normal NE

No.03

No.04

Normal NE

Normal NE
Subnet

No.01

Router

Root NE
(Bridge)

No.02

Normal NE

No.03

Normal NE

No.04

Normal NE

To set the IP Restriction Parameters of iPASOLINK 400 (1NE):


1. Right click on the
selected NE to display
the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open
the NE Properties
window.)
2. Click on Properties to
open the NE
Properties window.
3. The NE Properties
window will appear.
Click on the IP
Restriction category to
display the IP
Restriction parameters.
4. To preset/register IP
Addresses, use the
Add/Modify/Remove
buttons under
Restricted IP Address for top subnet.
proceed to the next step).

(If no IP addresses need to be preset, simply

5. Under Default Gateway for the Root NE (Bridge), input the IP Address of the Default
Gateway for the Root NE (Bridge).

- 194 -

NWD-104045
2.9.27.7 Editing NTP Parameters of iPASOLINK 400 (1NE)
This function allows for the individual setting of the NTP parameters for the iPASOLINK NE. In
case you need to set the NTP parameters individually, you may use this menu. Otherwise please
use the Tools Settings Bundle NTP Setting... from main menu.
To change the NTP Parameters:
1. Right click on the
selected NE to display
the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the
NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open
the NE Properties
window.
3. The NE Properties
window will appear. Click
on the NTP category to
display the NTP
parameters.
4. In this window, the NTP
Setting and NTP Server
Address Setting
information of the NTP
are defined. The
definitions of these
parameters are listed in Table 2.86.

Table 2.86 NTP Parameters for iPASOLINK 400 (1NE)


Parameter
NTP Setting

NTP
NTP Server Mode
NTP Client Mode
Stratum
Multicast Port
Multicast Interval

NTP Server
Address Setting

IP Address1~4
NTP Version1~4

Definition
NTP status: Enable or Disable.
Mode of NTP Server: Unicast or Multicast.
Mode of NTP Client: Unicast or Multicast.
stratum levels define the distance from the reference clock:
Default value is 15.
Multicast Port of NTP: Default value is Bridge-1.
Multicast Interval of NTP: Default value is
18[h]12[min]16[s](65536[s]).
NTP Server IP Address.
NTP Server Version: 3 or 4.

- 195 -

NWD-104045

Poll Time1~4

Interval of NTP Server:


16[s]
32[s]
1[min]4[s](64[s])
2[min]8[s](128[s])
4[min]16[s](256[s])
8[min]32[s](512[s])
17[min]4[s](1024[s])
34[min]8[s](2048[s])
1[h]8[min]16[s](4096[s])
2[h]16[min]32[s](8192[s])
4[h]33[min]4[s](16384[s])
9[h]6[min]8[s](32768[s])
18[h]12[min]16[s](65536[s])
36[h]24[min]32[s](131072[s])

- 196 -

NWD-104045
2.9.28 Setting NE Properties of iPASOLINK 1000
2.9.28.1 To set or modify the NE properties of iPASOLINK 1000:

1.

Right click on the selected


NE to display the context
menu. (Or double click on
the selected NE to open the
NE Properties window.)

2.

Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NE Properties window.

3.

The NE Properties window will appear. The default is the General category window,
which shows the current configuration.

4.

In this window, Equipment Type, NE Type, Redundancy, available Ports, Branch NE


Type, Branch Setting, IP Address, Subnet Mask, Subnet Name, NE Name, Area Name,
Note, NE Name Position, and Line Direction can be changed. The definitions of these
parameters are listed in Table 2.87.
Table 2.87 General Parameters of iPASOLINK 1000

Parameter
System

Network Setting

Equipment Type
NE Type
Branch NE Type
Redundancy
Port

NE Name Setting

Branch Setting
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Subnet Name
Network Element
Name
Area Name
Note

Position/
Direction

Name Position
Line Direction

Definition
The type of equipment: iPASOLINK 1000.
Role of the CTRL in the network. Root NE, Root NE
(Bridge), Branch NE or Normal NE.
The number of Branch NEs: None, 2-18branches.
The type of switch group: 1+0, 1+1/1+0 XPIC, 1+1 XPIC or
1+0 XPIC(2Way)/1+1 XPIC(2Way).
This provides the available ports in the selected NE. Any
available ports can be selected except NE1 and NMS port.
The branch setting of port: Bridge No.1-No.18.
IP address of the respective port.
Subnet mask of the respective port.
Defines the name of the respective port sub-network.
The name of the NE in the network. Maximum number of
characters possible is 32.
The area where the NE is located (optional). Maximum
number of characters possible is 32.
Additional description, or remarks on the NE (optional).
Maximum number of characters possible is 100.
The position of the text in the workspace can be customized
here.
The direction of the line in the workspace can be
customized here.

- 197 -

NWD-104045
2.9.28.2 Editing Inband Parameters of iPASOLINK 1000
To change the Inband Parameters:
1. Right click on the
selected NE to display
the context menu. (Or
double click on the
selected NE to open
the NE Properties
window.)
2. Click on Properties in
the context menu to
open the NE
Properties window.
3. The NE Properties
window will appear.
Click on the Inband
Management category
to display the Inband
parameters.
4. In this window, Port Setting, Branch Setting, IP Address, Subnet Mask, Subnet Name can
be changed. The definitions of these parameters are listed in Table 2.88.
Table 2.88 Inband Parameters for iPASOLINK 1000
Parameter
Network Setting

Port Setting
Port
Branch Setting
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Subnet Name

Definition
To choose the number of available inband ports: Not Used, 1
port, 2 ports, 3 ports or 4 ports.
This provides the whole inband ports in the selected NE.
The branch setting of port: Bridge No.1-No.18
IP address of the respective port.
Subnet mask of the respective port.
Defines the name of the respective port sub-network.

- 198 -

NWD-104045
2.9.28.3 Editing Async Parameters for iPASOLINK 1000
Whenever an iPASOLINK 1000 is connected via Async to another device, the Async category
is displayed in the Network overview.
To change the Async Parameters of iPASOLINK 1000:

1. Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu.


(Or double click on the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the Async category to display the Async
port information.
4. In this window, the IP Address of the Async port is defined. The definitions of these
parameters are listed in Table 2.89.
Table 2.89 Async Parameters for iPASOLINK 1000
Parameter
Common

Data Link
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Speed

Definition
The data link will be set to PPP when connected to a
PASOLINK V3/PASOLINK V4/MIU CPMC.
IP address of Async port.
Subnet mask of Async port.
Speed of Async port.

- 199 -

NWD-104045
2.9.28.4 Editing PNMS (NMS) Parameters (for Root NE only) of iPASOLINK 1000
When Root NE is selected as the NE Type, the PNMS (NMS) category is displayed in the
Network overview.
To change the PNMS (NMS) Parameters:
1. Right click on the selected
NE to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the
NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the
NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties
window will appear. Click
on the PNMS (NMS)
category to display the
PNMS (NMS) parameters.
4. In this window, the IP
Address and subnet mask
and default gateway
information of the PNMS (NMS) port are defined. The definitions of these parameters are
listed in Table 2.90.

Table 2.90 PNMS (NMS) Parameters for iPASOLINK 1000


Parameter
PNMS Connection

LAN

IP Address

Subnet Mask
Default Gateway

Definition
Defines the type of connection to the PNMS used by the Root
NE. The Root NE can connect to the PNMS PC by LAN (IP)
connection.
The IP address defines that it is used by the IDU LAN port.
However, it is only used when the LAN port is used for
connecting the PNMS.
IP address of LAN port of the NE. This is only set if the
selected NE is a Root NE.
Subnet mask of abovementioned LAN port.
Default Gateway of above mentioned NMS port.
Normally the IP address of the PNMS PC / Workstation or the
router associated with the PNMS.

- 200 -

NWD-104045
2.9.28.5 Editing Routing Parameters of iPASOLINK 1000
To indicate the Routing Parameters of iPASOLINK 1000:
1. Right click on the
selected NE to
display the context
menu.
(Or double click on
the selected NE to
open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties
to open the NE
Properties window.
3. The NE Properties
window will appear.
Click on the Routing
category to display
the routing
parameters.
4. The IP address of the
Default Gateway can
be indicated via this window. The Default Gateway IP address of Root NE is normally the
IP address of the PNMS PC / Workstation or the router associated with the PNMS. The
first subnet IP address is automatically set as the Default Gateway IP address for Branch
/Normal NEs.

- 201 -

NWD-104045
2.9.28.6 Editing IP Restriction Parameters (for Root NE [Bridge] only) of iPASOLINK 1000
In network configurations where the Subnet is not supposed to be disconnected at the Root NE,
IP addresses can be preset for devices connected ahead of the Root NE in the IP Restriction
Category window (for instance: IP addresses for the PNMS computer or the router). When
configuring (Create Configuration) with NetCfgToolj, IP addresses (apart from any preregistered
ones) are automatically assigned to other devices. When Root NE (Bridge) is selected as the
CTRL Type, the IP Restriction category is displayed in the Network overview.

No.01

PNMS

Root NE
(Bridge)

No.02

Normal NE

No.03

Normal NE

No.04

Normal NE
Subnet

No.01

Router

Root NE
(Bridge)

No.02

Normal NE

No.03

Normal NE

No.04

Normal NE

To set the IP Restriction Parameters of iPASOLINK 1000:


1. Right click on the selected
NE to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to
open the NE Properties
window.
3. The NE Properties window
will appear. Click on the IP
Restriction category to
display the IP Restriction
parameters.
4. To preset/register IP
Addresses, use the Add/Modify/Remove buttons under Restricted IP Address for top
subnet. (If no IP addresses need to be preset, simply proceed to the next step).
5. Under Default Gateway for the Root NE (Bridge), input the IP Address of the Default
Gateway for the Root NE (Bridge).

- 202 -

NWD-104045
2.9.28.7 Editing NTP Parameters of iPASOLINK 1000
This function allows for the individual setting of the NTP parameters for the iPASOLINK NE. In
case you need to set the NTP parameters individually, you may use this menu. Otherwise please
use the Tools Settings Bundle NTP Setting... from main menu.
To change the NTP Parameters:
1. Right click on the
selected NE to
display the context
menu.
(Or double click on
the selected NE to
open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties
in the context menu
to open the NE
Properties window.
3. The NE Properties
window will appear.
Click on the NTP
category to display
the NTP
parameters.
4. In this window, the
NTP Setting and NTP Server Address Setting information of the NTP are defined. The
definitions of these parameters are listed in Table 2.91.

Table 2.91 NTP Parameters for iPASOLINK 1000


Parameter
NTP Setting

NTP
NTP Server Mode
NTP Client Mode
Stratum
Multicast Port
Multicast Interval

NTP Server
Address Setting

IP Address1~4
NTP Version1~4

Definition
NTP status: Enable or Disable.
Mode of NTP Server: Unicast or Multicast.
Mode of NTP Client: Unicast or Multicast.
stratum levels define the distance from the reference clock:
Default value is 15.
Multicast Port of NTP: Default value is Bridge-1.
Multicast Interval of NTP: Default value is
18[h]12[min]16[s](65536[s]).
NTP Server IP Address.
NTP Server Version: 3 or 4.

- 203 -

NWD-104045
Poll Time1~4

Interval of NTP Server:


16[s]
32[s]
1[min]4[s](64[s])
2[min]8[s](128[s])
4[min]16[s](256[s])
8[min]32[s](512[s])
17[min]4[s](1024[s])
34[min]8[s](2048[s])
1[h]8[min]16[s](4096[s])
2[h]16[min]32[s](8192[s])
4[h]33[min]4[s](16384[s])
9[h]6[min]8[s](32768[s])
18[h]12[min]16[s](65536[s])
36[h]24[min]32[s](131072[s])

- 204 -

NWD-104045
2.9.29 Setting NE Properties of 5000iPS
2.9.29.1 To set or modify the NE properties of 5000iPS:

1.

Right click on the selected NE


to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)

2.

Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NE Properties window.

3.

The NE Properties window will appear. The default is the General category window,
which shows the current configuration.

4.

In this window, Equipment Type, NE Type, Redundancy, available Ports, Branch NE


Type, Branch Setting, IP Address, Subnet Mask, Subnet Name, NE Name, Area Name,
Note, NE Name Position, and Line Direction can be changed. The definitions of these
parameters are listed in Table 2.92.
Table 2.92 General Parameters of 5000iPS

Parameter
System

Network Setting

Equipment Type
NE Type
Branch NE Type
Redundancy
Port

NE Name Setting

Branch Setting
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Subnet Name
Network Element
Name
Area Name
Note

Position/
Direction

Name Position
Line Direction

Definition
The type of equipment: 5000iPS.
Role of the CTRL in the network. Root NE, Root NE
(Bridge), Branch NE or Normal NE.
The number of Branch NEs: None, 2-16branches.
The type of switch group: 1+0, 1+1/1+0 XPIC, 1+1 XPIC or
1+0 XPIC(2Way)/1+1 XPIC(2Way).
This provides the available ports in the selected NE. Any
available ports can be selected except NE1 and NMS port.
But as for MODEM ports, 10 ports can be selected at most.
The branch setting of port: Bridge No.1-No.16.
IP address of the respective port.
Subnet mask of the respective port.
Defines the name of the respective port sub-network.
The name of the NE in the network. Maximum number of
characters possible is 32.
The area where the NE is located (optional). Maximum
number of characters possible is 32.
Additional description, or remarks on the NE (optional).
Maximum number of characters possible is 100.
The position of the text in the workspace can be customized
here.
The direction of the line in the workspace can be
customized here.

- 205 -

NWD-104045
2.9.29.2 Editing Inband Parameters of iPASOLINK 5000iPS
To change the Inband Parameters:
1. Right click on the
selected NE to display
the context menu. (Or
double click on the
selected NE to open the
NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in
the context menu to
open the NE Properties
window.
3. The NE Properties
window will appear.
Click on the Inband
Management category
to display the Inband
parameters.
4. In this window, Port Setting, Branch Setting, IP Address, Subnet Mask, Subnet Name can
be changed. The definitions of these parameters are listed in Table 2.93.
Table 2.93 Inband Parameters for iPASOLINK 5000iPS
Parameter
Network Setting

Port Setting
Port
Branch Setting
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Subnet Name

Definition
To choose the number of available inband ports: Not Used, 1
port, 2 ports, 3 ports or 4 ports.
This provides the whole inband ports in the selected NE.
The branch setting of port: Bridge No.1-No.16
IP address of the respective port.
Subnet mask of the respective port.
Defines the name of the respective port sub-network.

- 206 -

NWD-104045
2.9.29.3 Editing Async Parameters for 5000iPS
Whenever an 5000iPS is connected via Async to another device, the Async category is
displayed in the Network overview.
To change the Async Parameters of 5000iPS:

1. Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu.


(Or double click on the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the Async category to display the Async
port information.
4. In this window, the IP Address of the Async port is defined. The definitions of these
parameters are listed in Table 2.94.
Table 2.94 Async Parameters for 5000iPS
Parameter
Common

Data Link
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Speed

Definition
The data link will be set to PPP when connected to a
PASOLINK V3/PASOLINK V4/MIU CPMC.
IP address of Async port.
Subnet mask of Async port.
Speed of Async port.

- 207 -

NWD-104045
2.9.29.4 Editing PNMS (NMS) Parameters (for Root NE only) of 5000iPS
When Root NE is selected as the NE Type, the PNMS (NMS) category is displayed in the
Network overview.
To change the PNMS (NMS) Parameters:
1. Right click on the selected
NE to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the
NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in the
context menu to open the
NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties
window will appear. Click
on the PNMS (NMS)
category to display the
PNMS (NMS)
parameters.
4. In this window, the IP
Address and subnet
mask and default gateway information of the PNMS (NMS) port are defined. The
definitions of these parameters are listed in Table 2.95.

Table 2.95 PNMS (NMS) Parameters for 5000iPS


Parameter
PNMS Connection

LAN

IP Address

Subnet Mask
Default Gateway

Definition
Defines the type of connection to the PNMS used by the Root
NE. The Root NE can connect to the PNMS PC by LAN (IP)
connection.
The IP address defines that it is used by the IDU LAN port.
However, it is only used when the LAN port is used for
connecting the PNMS.
IP address of LAN port of the NE. This is only set if the
selected NE is a Root NE.
Subnet mask of abovementioned LAN port.
Default Gateway of above mentioned NMS port.
Normally the IP address of the PNMS PC / Workstation or the
router associated with the PNMS.

- 208 -

NWD-104045
2.9.29.5 Editing Routing Parameters of 5000iPS
To indicate the Routing Parameters of 5000iPS:
1. Right click on the
selected NE to
display the context
menu.
(Or double click on
the selected NE to
open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties
to open the NE
Properties window.
3. The NE Properties
window will appear.
Click on the Routing
category to display
the routing
parameters.
4. The IP address of the
Default Gateway can
be indicated via this window. The Default Gateway IP address of Root NE is normally the
IP address of the PNMS PC / Workstation or the router associated with the PNMS. The
first subnet IP address is automatically set as the Default Gateway IP address for Branch
/Normal NEs.

- 209 -

NWD-104045
2.9.29.6 Editing IP Restriction Parameters (for Root NE [Bridge] only) of 5000iPS
In network configurations where the Subnet is not supposed to be disconnected at the Root NE,
IP addresses can be preset for devices connected ahead of the Root NE in the IP Restriction
Category window (for instance: IP addresses for the PNMS computer or the router). When
configuring (Create Configuration) with NetCfgToolj, IP addresses (apart from any preregistered
ones) are automatically assigned to other devices. When Root NE (Bridge) is selected as the
CTRL Type, the IP Restriction category is displayed in the Network overview.

No.01

PNMS

Root NE
(Bridge)

No.02

Normal NE

No.03

Normal NE

No.04

Normal NE
Subnet

No.01

Router

Root NE
(Bridge)

No.02

Normal NE

No.04

No.03

Normal NE

Normal NE

To set the IP Restriction Parameters of 5000iPS:


1. Right click on the selected
NE to display the context
menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to open
the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window
will appear. Click on the IP
Restriction category to
display the IP Restriction
parameters.
4. To preset/register IP
Addresses, use the
Add/Modify/Remove buttons under Restricted IP Address for top subnet.
addresses need to be preset, simply proceed to the next step).

(If no IP

5. Under Default Gateway for the Root NE (Bridge), input the IP Address of the Default
Gateway for the Root NE (Bridge).

- 210 -

NWD-104045
2.9.29.7 Editing NTP Parameters of 5000iPS
This function allows for the individual setting of the NTP parameters for the iPASOLINK NE. In
case you need to set the NTP parameters individually, you may use this menu. Otherwise please
use the Tools Settings Bundle NTP Setting... from main menu.
To change the NTP Parameters:
1. Right click on the
selected NE to
display the context
menu.
(Or double click
on the selected
NE to open the NE
Properties
window.)
2. Click on
Properties in the
context menu to
open the NE
Properties
window.
3. The NE Properties
window will
appear. Click on
the NTP category
to display the NTP parameters.
4. In this window, the NTP Setting and NTP Server Address Setting information of the NTP
are defined. The definitions of these parameters are listed in Table 2.96.

Table 2.96 NTP Parameters for 5000iPS


Parameter
NTP Setting

NTP
NTP Server Mode
NTP Client Mode
Stratum
Multicast Port
Multicast Interval

NTP Server
Address Setting

IP Address1~4
NTP Version1~4

Definition
NTP status: Enable or Disable.
Mode of NTP Server: Unicast or Multicast.
Mode of NTP Client: Unicast or Multicast.
stratum levels define the distance from the reference clock:
Default value is 15.
Multicast Port of NTP: Default value is Bridge-1.
Multicast Interval of NTP: Default value is
18[h]12[min]16[s](65536[s]).
NTP Server IP Address.
NTP Server Version: 3 or 4.

- 211 -

NWD-104045
Poll Time1~4

Interval of NTP Server:


16[s]
32[s]
1[min]4[s](64[s])
2[min]8[s](128[s])
4[min]16[s](256[s])
8[min]32[s](512[s])
17[min]4[s](1024[s])
34[min]8[s](2048[s])
1[h]8[min]16[s](4096[s])
2[h]16[min]32[s](8192[s])
4[h]33[min]4[s](16384[s])
9[h]6[min]8[s](32768[s])
18[h]12[min]16[s](65536[s])
36[h]24[min]32[s](131072[s])

- 212 -

NWD-104045
2.9.30 Setting NE Properties of iPASOLINK EX
2.9.30.1 To set or modify the NE properties of iPASOLINK EX:

1.

Right click on the selected


NE to display the context
menu. (Or double click on
the selected NE to open the
NE Properties window.)

2.

Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NE Properties window.

3.

The NE Properties window will appear. The default is the General category window, which
shows the current configuration.

4.

In this window, NE Type, Branch NE Type, NMS Port State, Branch Setting, IP Address,
Subnet Mask, Subnet Name, NE Name, Area Name, Note, NE Name Position, and Antenna
Direction can be changed. The definitions of these parameters are listed in Table 2.97.
Table 2.97 General Parameters of iPASOLINK EX

Parameter
System

Network Setting

Equipment Type
NE Type
Branch NE Type
Port
Branch Setting

NE Name Setting

IP Address
Subnet Mask
Subnet Name
Network Element
Name
Area Name
Note

Position/Direction

Name Position
Antenna
Direction

Definition
The type of equipment: iPASOLINK EX.
Role of the CTRL in the network. Root NE, Root NE
(Bridge), Branch NE or Normal NE.
The number of Branch NEs: None, 2, or 3 branches.
This provides the available ports in the selected NE. Only
NMS port can be changed.
The branch setting of port: Bridge No.1, Bridge No.2 or
Bridge No.3.
IP address of the respective port.
Subnet mask of the respective port.
Defines the name of the respective port sub-network.
The name of the NE in the network. Maximum number of
characters possible is 32.
The area where the NE is located (optional). Maximum
number of characters possible is 32.
Additional description, or remarks on the NE (optional).
Maximum number of characters possible is 100.
The position of the text in the workspace can be customized
here.
The antenna icon in the workspace can be customized to
face either Right or Left.

- 213 -

NWD-104045
2.9.30.2 Editing PNMS (NMS) Parameters (for Root NE only) of iPASOLINK EX
When Root NE is selected as the NE Type, the PNMS (NMS) category is displayed in the
Network overview.
To change the PNMS (NMS) Parameters:
1. Right click on the
selected NE to display
the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the
NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties in
the context menu to
open the NE Properties
window.
3. The NE Properties
window will appear.
Click on the PNMS
(NMS) category to
display the PNMS
(NMS) parameters.
4. In this window, the IP
Address and subnet
mask and default
gateway information of
the PNMS (NMS) port
are defined. The definitions of these parameters are listed in Table 2.98.

Table 2.98 PNMS (NMS) Parameters for iPASOLINK EX


Parameter
PNMS Connection

LAN

IP Address

Subnet Mask
Default Gateway

Definition
Defines the type of connection to the PNMS used by the Root
NE. The Root NE can connect to the PNMS PC by LAN (IP)
connection.
The IP address defines that it is used by the IDU LAN port.
However, it is only used when the LAN port is used for
connecting the PNMS.
IP address of LAN port of the NE. This is only set if the
selected NE is a Root NE.
Subnet Mask of abovementioned LAN port.
Default Gateway of above mentioned NMS port.
Normally the IP address of the PNMS PC / Workstation or the
router associated with the PNMS.

- 214 -

NWD-104045
2.9.30.3 Editing Routing Parameters of iPASOLINK EX
To indicate the Routing Parameters of iPASOLINK EX:
1. Right click on the
selected NE to
display the context
menu.
(Or double click on
the selected NE to
open the NE
Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties
to open the NE
Properties window.
3. The NE Properties
window will appear.
Click on the Routing
category to display
the routing
parameters.
4. The IP address of the
Default Gateway can
be indicated via this window. The Default Gateway IP address of Root NE is normally the
IP address of the PNMS PC / Workstation or the router associated with the PNMS. The
first subnet IP address is automatically set as the Default Gateway IP address for Branch/
Normal NEs.

- 215 -

NWD-104045
2.9.30.4 Editing IP Restriction Parameters (for Root NE [Bridge] only) of iPASOLINK EX
In network configurations where the Subnet is not supposed to be disconnected at the Root NE,
IP addresses can be preset for devices connected ahead of the Root NE in the IP Restriction
Category window (for instance: IP addresses for the PNMS computer or the router). When
configuring (Create Configuration) with NetCfgToolj, IP addresses (apart from any preregistered
ones) are automatically assigned to other devices. When Root NE (Bridge) is selected as the
CTRL Type, the IP Restriction category is displayed in the Network overview.

No.01

PNMS

Root NE
(Bridge)

No.02

Normal NE

No.03

No.04

Normal NE

Normal NE
Subnet

No.01

PNMS

Router

Root NE
(Bridge)

No.02

Normal NE

No.03

Normal NE

No.04

Normal NE

To set the IP Restriction Parameters of iPASOLINK EX:


1. Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the IP Restriction category to display the
IP Restriction parameters.
4. To preset/register IP Addresses, use the Add/Modify/Remove buttons under Restricted
IP Address for top subnet. (If no IP addresses need to be preset, simply proceed to the
next step).
5. Under Default Gateway for the Root NE (Bridge), input the IP Address of the Default
Gateway for the Root NE (Bridge).

- 216 -

NWD-104045
2.9.30.5 Editing NTP Parameters of iPASOLINK EX
This function allows for the individual setting of the NTP parameters for the ALL OUTDOOR NE.
In case you need to set the NTP parameters individually, you may use this menu. Otherwise
please use the Tools Settings Bundle NTP Setting... from main menu.
To change the NTP Parameters:
1. Right click on the
selected NE to display
the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the
NE Properties
window.)
2. Click on Properties in
the context menu to
open the NE
Properties window.
3. The NE Properties
window will appear.
Click on the NTP
category to display the
NTP parameters.
4. In this window, the NTP
Setting and NTP Server
Address Setting information of the NTP are defined. The definitions of these parameters
are listed in Table 2.99.

Table 2.99 NTP Parameters for iPASOLINK EX


Parameter
NTP Setting

NTP
NTP Server Mode
NTP Client Mode
Stratum
Multicast Port
Multicast Interval

NTP Server
Address Setting

IP Address1~4
NTP Version1~4

Definition
NTP status: Enable or Disable.
Mode of NTP Server: Unicast or Multicast.
Mode of NTP Client: Unicast or Multicast.
stratum levels define the distance from the reference clock:
Default value is 15.
Multicast Port of NTP: Default value is Bridge-1.
Multicast Interval of NTP: Default value is
18[h]12[min]16[s](65536[s]).
NTP Server IP Address.
NTP Server Version: 3 or 4.

- 217 -

NWD-104045

Poll Time1~4

Interval of NTP Server:


16[s]
32[s]
1[min]4[s](64[s])
2[min]8[s](128[s])
4[min]16[s](256[s])
8[min]32[s](512[s])
17[min]4[s](1024[s])
34[min]8[s](2048[s])
1[h]8[min]16[s](4096[s])
2[h]16[min]32[s](8192[s])
4[h]33[min]4[s](16384[s])
9[h]6[min]8[s](32768[s])
18[h]12[min]16[s](65536[s])
36[h]24[min]32[s](131072[s])

- 218 -

NWD-104045
2.9.31 Setting NE Properties of iPASOLINK SX
2.9.31.1 To set or modify the NE properties of iPASOLINK SX:

1.

Right click on the selected


NE to display the context
menu. (Or double click on
the selected NE to open the
NE Properties window.)

2.

Click on Properties in the context menu to open the NE Properties window.

3.

The NE Properties window will appear. The default is the General category window, which
shows the current configuration.

4.

In this window, NE Type, IP Address, Subnet Mask, Subnet Name, NE Name, Area Name,
Note, NE Name Position, and Antenna Direction can be changed. The definitions of these
parameters are listed in Table 2.100.
Table 2.100 General Parameters of iPASOLINK SX

Parameter
System

Network Setting

NE Name Setting

Equipment Type
NE Type

Port
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Subnet Name
Network Element
Name
Area Name
Note

Position/Direction

Name Position
Antenna
Direction

Definition
The type of equipment: iPASOLINK SX.
Role of the CTRL in the network. Root NE (Bridge) or
Normal NE. The iPASOLINK SX doesnt have the routing
function, so it cant be set to Root NE or Branch NE.
This provides the available ports in the selected NE.
IP address of the respective port.
Subnet mask of the respective port.
Defines the name of the respective port sub-network.
The name of the NE in the network. Maximum number of
characters possible is 32.
The area where the NE is located (optional). Maximum
number of characters possible is 32.
Additional description, or remarks on the NE (optional).
Maximum number of characters possible is 100.
The position of the text in the workspace can be customized
here.
The antenna icon in the workspace can be customized to
face either Right or Left.

- 219 -

NWD-104045
2.9.31.2 Editing IP Restriction Parameters (for Root NE [Bridge] only) of iPASOLINK SX
In network configurations where the Subnet is not supposed to be disconnected at the Root NE,
IP addresses can be preset for devices connected ahead of the Root NE in the IP Restriction
Category window (for instance: IP addresses for the PNMS computer or the router). When
configuring (Create Configuration) with NetCfgToolj, IP addresses (apart from any preregistered
ones) are automatically assigned to other devices. When Root NE (Bridge) is selected as the
CTRL Type, the IP Restriction category is displayed in the Network overview.

No.01

PNMS

Root NE
(Bridge)

No.02

Normal NE

No.03

No.04

Normal NE

Normal NE
Subnet

No.01

PNMS

Router

Root NE
(Bridge)

No.02

Normal NE

No.03

Normal NE

No.04

Normal NE

To set the IP Restriction Parameters of iPASOLINK SX:


1. Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the IP Restriction category to display the
IP Restriction parameters.
4. To preset/register IP Addresses, use the Add/Modify/Remove buttons under Restricted
IP Address for top subnet. (If no IP addresses need to be preset, simply proceed to the
next step).
5. Under Default Gateway for the Root NE (Bridge), input the IP Address of the Default
Gateway for the Root NE (Bridge).

- 220 -

NWD-104045
2.9.31.3 Editing NTP Parameters of iPASOLINK SX
This function allows for the individual setting of the NTP parameters for the ALL OUTDOOR NE.
In case you need to set the NTP parameters individually, you may use this menu. Otherwise
please use the Tools Settings Bundle NTP Setting... from main menu.
To change the NTP Parameters:
1. Right click on the
selected NE to display
the context menu.
(Or double click on the
selected NE to open the
NE Properties
window.)
2. Click on Properties in
the context menu to
open the NE
Properties window.
3. The NE Properties
window will appear.
Click on the NTP
category to display the
NTP parameters.
4. In this window, the NTP
Setting and NTP Server
Address Setting information of the NTP are defined. The definitions of these parameters
are listed in Table 2.101.

Table 2.101 NTP Parameters for iPASOLINK SX


Parameter
NTP Setting

NTP
NTP Server Mode
NTP Client Mode
Stratum
Multicast Port
Multicast Interval

NTP Server
Address Setting

IP Address1~4
NTP Version1~4

Definition
NTP status: Enable or Disable.
Mode of NTP Server: Unicast or Multicast.
Mode of NTP Client: Unicast or Multicast.
stratum levels define the distance from the reference clock:
Default value is 15.
Multicast Port of NTP: Default value is Bridge-1.
Multicast Interval of NTP: Default value is
18[h]12[min]16[s](65536[s]).
NTP Server IP Address.
NTP Server Version: 3 or 4.

- 221 -

NWD-104045

Poll Time1~4

Interval of NTP Server:


16[s]
32[s]
1[min]4[s](64[s])
2[min]8[s](128[s])
4[min]16[s](256[s])
8[min]32[s](512[s])
17[min]4[s](1024[s])
34[min]8[s](2048[s])
1[h]8[min]16[s](4096[s])
2[h]16[min]32[s](8192[s])
4[h]33[min]4[s](16384[s])
9[h]6[min]8[s](32768[s])
18[h]12[min]16[s](65536[s])
36[h]24[min]32[s](131072[s])

- 222 -

NWD-104045

2.9.32 Setting Line Properties


To modify line properties:
1. Right click on the line to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the line to open the Line Properties window.)

2. Click on Line Properties in the context menu.


+

a) For PASOLINK Mx/PASOLINK

b) For PASOLINK V3/PASOLINK V4/MIU

c) For PASOLINK NEO/


PASOLINK NEO CPV/
PASOLINK NEO NODAL/
PASOLIN NEO/a/
PASOLINK NEO HP/
PASOLINK NEO HP/A /5000S

d) For iPASOLINK 200/ iPASOLINK 400/


iPASOLINK 1000/ 5000iPS

- 223 -

NWD-104045
e) For iPASOLINK EX/ iPASOLINK SX

3. The Line Properties window will appear. The Connect Mode (e.g. RS-485, RS-232C or
10BaseT) of any two NEs connected via back-to-back connection can be changed.
+
Connect Port specifies the PASOLINK Mx/PASOLINK port where line (back-to-back) is
+
to be connected this is only available for PASOLINK Mx/PASOLINK NEs.
+

PASOLINK Mx/PASOLINK can be connected back-to-back with NE1, NE2 or LAN ports.
PASOLINK NEO/PASOLINK NEO CPV/PASOLINK NEO NODAL/PASOLINK NEO/a
/PASOLINK NEO HP/PASOLINK NEO HP/A /5000S can be connected back-to-back with
EM1 (NMS), EM2 (NE) or ASYNC ports.
iPASOLINK 200/iPASOLINK 400/iPASOLINK 1000/5000iPS can be connected
back-to-back with NMS, NE1(iPASOLINK 200, iPASOLINK 1000, 5000iPS) / NE/1
(iPASOLINK 400) or Inband ports.
iPASOLINK EX/iPASOLINK SX can be connected back-to-back with NMS(iPASOLINK EX
only) or Inband ports.
Any two NEs connected back-to-back can be assigned a Line Name.

- 224 -

NWD-104045
4. After user modifies Line Name in the Line Properties window, Line Name will be
displayed on the Network window as follows.

- 225 -

NWD-104045

2.10 Creating Configuration


The Create Configuration function allows flexible network configurations. This function can
automatically configure PM Cards and PNMS. IP Addresses and PM Type are automatically
assigned to the PM Cards in the workspace. (Configuration is carried out, based on the
permissible number of NEs per network.)
To create configurations:
1. Verify that the workspace is
completed and that all the NEs
and back-to-back (B-B) lines for
this network have been inserted.
2. Click on Tools Create
Configuration in the main menu
(or click

icon).

3. The create configuration window wizard will be displayed. Click on [Next] button to
continue.

4. Check the Automatically set PMC type box if necessary on the ensuing window. By
ticking this box, NetCfgToolj will automatically set PMC type and allocate NE's according
to the maximum number of NE's that can be contained in a sub-network. Click on [Next]
button to continue.

- 226 -

NWD-104045
5. A message box, stating the status of the configuration will appear. If no errors are
encountered during the network configuration, this message will just prompt the user that
process was Completed successfully". Click on [Next] button to continue.

6. Click on [Finish] button to complete the procedure.

7. Glide the pointer over the NEs displayed in the workspace to verify if all the NEs have
been assigned with appropriate IP address and names.

NOTE: When iPASOLINK or ALL OUTDOOR NE exist in the workspace, and the NTP
Server is not set when the Create Configuration is executed, it will result in an error.
The NTP setting must be set before executing Create Configuration.

- 227 -

NWD-104045

2.11 Creating Configuration (All Networks)


The Create Configuration (All Networks) feature enables multiple networks to be concurrently
configured in one single action using the Create Configuration function.
To create configuration (All Networks):
1. Verify that the workspace is completed
and that all the NEs and back-to-back
(B-B) lines for this network have been
inserted.
2. Click on Tools Create Configuration
(All Networks) in the main menu.
Before processing is executed, the following warning-alert messages appear:
After the Create Configuration (All Networks) process is underway, it cannot be
stopped before it is completed unless an error occurs. Once the configuring is
completed, it cannot be undone (i.e. Undo is not available).
When Create Configuration (All Networks)" is executed, the progress bar will be displayed.
Clicking the Cancel button of the progress bar window immediately terminates the network
configuration process, whereby any partially completed Network Configurations will be retained
in the state they were in at the time the button was clicked.
Moreover, if during the "Create Configuration (All Networks)" procedure, the in-process
configuring of any of the networks were disrupted, an error message would be issued for the
affected network; whereby, configuring for any remaining networks would be aborted.
NOTE: The NTP Server is not set when the Create Configuration(All Networks) is executed with
iPASOLINK or ALL OUTDOOR series NE in one network, it will result in an error. The
NTP setting must be set before executing Create Configuration(All Networks).

- 228 -

NWD-104045

2.12 Changed NEs List


This function provides a quick view of the NEs whose parameters have been changed since the
last update of the network. It indicates those NEs whose configuration data needs to be
downloaded to PM cards due to the changes. To make sure that the appropriate Changed NEs
List is displayed, complete the Export Configuration File to PM Card procedure for the active
workspace and the downloading of configuration files to the PM Cards before extending.

To display this window, click on File Changed NEs List in the main menu.
[Close] button can be used to close the window.
[Save] button can be used to save the listing to a csv file.
[Print] button can be used to print the listing via a printer.
Information Functions of the Changed NEs List:
Item
Selected Network

Definition
Selected Network (Default):
The Changed NEs List window displays only the NE information for
the Network that has been selected.
All Networks:
The Changed NEs List window displays the entire NE information
for all NEs in all Networks.

- 229 -

NWD-104045

2.13 Viewing the Network Element List


With the NetCfgToolj, it is possible to display the entire Network Element information
(Highlighting, Network Name, Subnet Name, Network Element Name, Equipment Type, PMC
Type, Primary status, IP Address, Network Address, Subnet Mask, NTP Server Address1, NTP
Server Address2, NTP Server Address3 and NTP Server Address4) for either the currently
selected network, or for all of them, in the Network Element List window.
To view the Network Element List:
1. Click on Tools Network Element List in the main menu.
The Network Element List contains the following information about the selected (or all) networks:
Item
Highlighting

Definition

Network Name
Subnet Name
Network Element Name
Equipment Type

Primary
IP Address
Network Address
Subnet Mask

Network Name
Subnet Name
Network Element Name
The type of equipment:
PASOLINK V3, PASOLINK V4
MIU (LineConcentrator), MIU
PASOLINK Mx, PASOLINK+ STM-1, PASOLINK+ PDH
PASOLINK NEO, PASOLINK NEO (2-WAY), PASOLINK NEO
(Terminal)
PASOLINK NEO CPV, PASOLINK NEO CPV (Terminal)
PASOLINK NEO NODAL (2-WAY), PASOLINK NEO NODAL (Terminal)
PASOLINK NEO NODAL (Tributary Only), PASOLINK NEO/a
PASOLINK NEO HP,PASOLINK NEO HP/A
iPASOLINK 200, iPASOLINK 200(2-Way), iPASOLINK 200(Terminal),
iPASOLINK 400
iPASOLINK 1000
5000iPS
5000S, 5000S (Terminal), 5000S (2xTerminal), 5000S (Repeater)
PASOLINK Mx (Bridge NE), PASOLINK+ SMT-1 (Bridge NE)
PASOLINK+ PDH (Bridge NE)
iPASOLINK EX
iPASOLINK SX
MIB Load
CPMC/SCPMC/RPMC
(for PASOLINK V3/PASOLINK V4/MIU only)
Root NE/Branch NE/Normal NE
(for PASOLINK Mx/PASOLINK+ only)
Root NE/Root NE (Bridge)/Branch NE/Normal NE
(for PASOLINK NEO/PASOLINK NEO CPV/
PASOLINK NEO NODAL/ PASOLINK NEO/a /
PASOLINK NEO HP/PASOLINK NEO HP/A /
iPASOLINK 200/ iPASOLINK 400/ iPASOLINK 1000/
5000iPS/5000S /iPASOLINK EX/ iPASOLINK SX )
An asterisk (*) denotes that that the IP Address is the Primary IP Address
IP Address of the respective port
Network Address of the respective port
Subnet mask of the respective port

NTP Server Address1


NTP Server Address2
NTP Server Address3
NTP Server Address4

the 1st IP Address of iPASOLINK NTP Server


the 2nd IP Address of iPASOLINK NTP Server
the 3rd IP Address of iPASOLINK NTP Server
the 4th IP Address of iPASOLINK NTP Server

PMC Type

Highlighted NEs are denoted by checkmark

- 230 -

NWD-104045

Information Functions of the Network Element List:


Item
Definition
Selected Network (Default):
Selected Network
The Network Element List window displays only the NE information for
the Network that has been selected.
All Networks:
The Network Element List window displays the entire NE
information for all NEs in all Networks.
Select Element Type

Select IP Address Type

IP Address Check

Search

The Network Element List window displays only information for the
selected Equipment Type.
All/PASOLINK V3/PASOLINK V4/PASOLINK Mx/MIU/
PASOLINK+ STM-1/PASOLINK+ PDH/
PASOLINK NEO/PASOLINK NEO CPV/PASOLINK NEO NODAL/
PASOLINK NEO/a /PASOLINK NEO HP/PASOLINK NEO HP/A /
iPASOLINK 200/ iPASOLINK 400/ iPASOLINK 1000/
5000iPS/ 5000S/
PASOLINK+ Mx (Bridge NE)/PASOLINK+ STM-1(Bridge NE)/
PASOLINK+ PDH (Bridge NE) /
iPASOLINK EX/iPASOLINK SX/MIB Load
All IP Addresses:
The Network Element List window displays all of the IP Addresses.
Primary IP Address only:
The Network Element List window displays only Primary IP Addresses.
The MIB Load NE IP Addresses can be found out when they are same as
NEs IP Addresses.
Clicking [Check] button executes the check process.
Searches can be conducted according to designated criteria (e.g. item /
search character string / Up / Down.
Selecting Down searches for matching criteria in top to bottom sequence;
Selecting Up searches in bottom to top sequence.
The match condition is partial agreement with the character string entered
in the input field.
* Combo box (The following items can be selected):
Network Name/Subnet Name/Network Element Name/
IP Address/Network Address
*Text input field
A maximum of 32 characters may be inputted.
*Up/Down Radio-button
Up: searches bottom to top
Down: searches top to bottom

[Close] button can be used to exit (i.e. close) the Network Element List window.
[Save] button can be used to store (i.e. save) the listing in a csv file.
[Print] button can be used to print a hard copy of the list using a printer.
[Check] button can be used to find (i.e. check) the duplicate IP Address.
[Import] button can be used to add (i.e. import) the MIB Load NE IP Address.

- 231 -

NWD-104045
NOTE: Highlighted item column names or Primary item column names to be saved or printed
out are shortened; because, during [Save] and [Print] processing, the Mark designations (data
portion) for the highlighted item (#) and Primary Item (*) are outputted together.

Count information (outlined in red above):


Network Count: indicates the number of Networks displayed (Selected Network: obviously,
when Selected Network is chosen, the digit 1 is always displayed; All
Networks: conversely, when All Networks is chosen, the total number [of all
networks] is displayed).
Subnet Count: indicates the number of Subnets displayed.
NE Count:

indicates the number of NEs displayed.

View Count:

Indicates the total number of all items displayed in the Network Element List
window (the number of displayed lines for IP addresses will correspond to
the total no. of IP addresses in the network; evens when individual NEs may
have been assigned multiple IP Addresses.

MIB Load NE IP Address Count: Indicates the total number of all MIB Load NE IP Addresses.

As illustrated here; when a line is selected and right-clicked, the Highlighting ON/Highlighting
OFF menu is displayed. When the Highlighting function is executed from the Highlighting

- 232 -

NWD-104045
ON/Highlighting OFF menu, this will be reflected in real time in the respective NE symbol for
the Network Element Name displayed in the Highlighting column and the corresponding
Network screen in the Network Element List window.
To import MIB Load NE IP Address:
1, Click [Import] button, then the Import MIB Load NE IP Address dialog will be show.
2, Click [ ... ] button to select the *.csv file, which contains MIB Load NE IP Addresses.

3, Click [Apply] button to start the import process. After it is finished, MIB Load NE IP
Addresses will be listed at the Network Element List
dialog.

To check duplicate IP address:


1, When the Import MIB Load IP Address dialog is closed, the program will check
duplicate IP addresses automatically;
2, At the Nework Element List dialog, click [Check] button to start checking. After
checking, duplicate IP Addresses will be showed with yellow line.
3, At the Check Duplicate IP Address dialog, Click [Save] button to save the duplicate IP
Addresses result to csv file.

- 233 -

NWD-104045

2.14 Exporting Network Configuration Files


2.14.1 Exporting Network Configuration Files for PM Card
This function allows the user to create PM card configuration files automatically. NetCfgToolj,
creates the configuration for the given network and exports all configuration files (system.cfg and
network.cfg) for each of the specified PMC sites in the workspace.) This ultimately, saves time
and minimizes the potential for error in the network design process.
To export network configuration file for PM Card:
1. Click on File Export Configuration Files for PM Card... on the main menu.

2. Specify the directory of the folder where the PM Card network configuration file is to be
exported. The exported file should be config (*.cfg) format. The file will be stored in
/../PM-Card/Network-x folder.

3. Click on [OK] button to continue the process.

- 234 -

NWD-104045
4. Changed NEs List window will appear.

5. Click on [Close] button to continue the process.


[Save] button can be used to save the listing in a csv file.
[Print] button can be used to print the listing via a printer.
6. Warning message window will appear.

7. Click on [Yes] button to continue the process.


NOTE: Contents of the Changed NEs List window are purged.
Click on [No] button if the contents of the Changed NEs List window are needed. The
previous Changed NE List window will return.
8. Verify that the file has been saved in the designated folder.

NOTE: With regards to iPASOLINK series equipments, when the Inband port is available,
[iPASOLINK_Address_List.csv] file is exported instead of the PM Card network
configuration file. Also AOR series equipments, [iPASOLINK_Address_List.csv] file
is exported too.
Please note that this file is not to be downloaded to NE.
Instead, please configure network in LCT by referring to this file.

- 235 -

NWD-104045

2.15 Saving Current Workspace


This function allows the network designer to save the current workspace in an *.nct file format
that can be opened using the NetCfgToolj for future modifications in the network. It is
recommended that the user save the existing workspace for an easier addition, and/or
modification of the existing NMS network.
To save the current workspace:
1. Click on File Save from the main menu of the main window.

2. Specify the Folder and File Name where the current workspace is to be saved.
3. Click on [Save] button.
4. Verify that the workspace was saved in the selected folder.

- 236 -

NWD-104045

2.16 Printing Current Network


This function allows the network designer to print the designed network. First please define
the area of the network to be printed.
To define the Print Area:
1. Click on File Print Area Setting from the main menu of the main window.

2. The default printing area (extending over the entire window) is outlined by a light-blue
dotted line as shown below.

- 237 -

NWD-104045
3. To define a different printing area (Print Area), depress the left button of the mouse and
draw a box around the desired area as shown below.

4. Click on File Print from the main menu of the main window to start printing.

- 238 -

NWD-104045

2.17 Network Address File Exporting


This function allows to output the network address information assigned to all the networks
registered in NetCfgToolj as *.csv file. This function allows the user to add/delete/correct the
network address information of each network on the csv file instead of NetCfgToolj at the
addition/deletion/correction of network address on each network.
To export the Network Address File:
1. Click on Network Export Network Address... on the main menu.

2. Specify the Folder and File Name where the Network Address is to be saved.

3. Click on [Save] button.


4. Verify that the Network Address File was saved in the selected folder.

- 239 -

NWD-104045

2.18 Network Address File Importing


This function reflects the Network Address registered in the Network Address File on each
network of NetConfigToolj. If the Network registered in the Network Address File does not exist
on NetConfigToolj, this function adds the non-existing Network with NetConfigToolj.
To import the Network Address File:
1. Click on Network Import Network Address... on the main menu.

2. Select the *.csv file of the Network Address from the list.

3. Click [Open] button.


4. If a Network Address File is currently loaded, a pop-up message will appear to remind the
user to save the current Network Address File before opening a new one. Click [Cancel]
button and save the current Network Address File and repeat step 1.

- 240 -

NWD-104045
5. Verify that the correct Network Address File is added to the Network Properties window.

NOTE:
*Network Address file format is as shown below.
Network Id, Network Name, Network Address, Subnet Mask

*When if illegal format/network Address error/Subnet Mask error is present in importing a


Network Address File, an error message is displayed.

- 241 -

NWD-104045

2.19 Setting Default Subnet Mask


This function is used to setup Default Subnet Mask when allocating NE icons anew.
To setup Default Subnet Mask for NE (taking PASOLINK V4 as an example):
1. Click Edit -> Default Subnet Mask-> PASOLINK ->/29(255.255.255.248) from the menu (or
click

icon and select /29(255.255.255.248)).

2. Click Edit -> Network Element Type -> PASOLINK -> PASOLINK V4 from the menu (or
click

icon and select PASOLINK V4).

3. In the current workspace, click desired spot to add NE.

- 242 -

NWD-104045
NOTE: Default Subnet Mask can be setup for each NE type with each categorized into 5
+
different series (PASOLINK, PASOLINK , PASOLINK NEO, iPASOLINK, ALL OUTDOOR)
of products.
Series
PASOLINK

Subnet Mask

NE Type

/28(255.255.255.240)

PASOLINK V3

/29(255.255.255.248)

PASOLINK V4

/30(255.255.255.252)

MIU(Line Concentrator)
MIU
PASOLINK V4(Bridge NE)

PASOLINK

/26(255.255.255.192)

PASOLINK Mx

/27(255.255.255.224)

PASOLINK STM-1

/28(255.255.255.240)

PASOLINK PDH

/29(255.255.255.248)
/30(255.255.255.252)
PASOLINK NEO

/26(255.255.255.192)

PASOLINK NEO

/27(255.255.255.224)

PASOLINK NEO CPV

/28(255.255.255.240)

PASOLINK NEO NODAL

/29(255.255.255.248)

PASOLINK NEO/a

/30(255.255.255.252)

PASOLINK NEO HP
PASOLINK NEO HP/A
5000S
PASOLINK Mx(Bridge NE)
+

PASOLINK STM-1(Bridge NE)


+

PASOLINK PDH(Bridge NE)


iPASOLINK

/24(255.255.255.0)

iPASOLINK 200

/25(255.255.255.128)

iPASOLINK 400

/26(255.255.255.192)

iPASOLINK 1000

/27(255.255.255.224)

5000iPS

/28(255.255.255.240)
/29(255.255.255.248)
/30(255.255.255.252)
ALL OUTDOOR

/24(255.255.255.0)

iPASOLINK EX

- 243 -

NWD-104045
/25(255.255.255.128)
/26(255.255.255.192)
/27(255.255.255.224)
/28(255.255.255.240)
/29(255.255.255.248)
/30(255.255.255.252)

- 244 -

iPASOLINK SX

NWD-104045

2.20 Network Sort


With this function, name of networks displayed in Network view can be sorted into ascending or
descending order by ASCII characters or into customized order by the user.
- To sort into ascending order of ASCII characters:
1) Click Network -> Sort -> Ascending order from the menu.

- To sort into descending order of ASCII characters:


1) Click Network -> Sort -> Descending order from the menu.

- 245 -

NWD-104045
- To sort into customized order by the user:
1) Click Network -> Sort -> Customize order from the menu.

2) Moving back and forth between different Networks can be done by clicking UP or Down
button.

- 246 -

NWD-104045

2.21 Time Zone Setting


This function allows the user to set Time Zone for a bundle of NEs at the same time.
To set Time Zone for NEs:
1. Click on Tools Settings Bundle Time Zone Setting... on the main menu.

2. In this window, the Time Zone is defined. These parameters are defined in Table 2.102.
Table 2.102 Time Zone Parameters
Item
Time Zone

Definition
HH: Hour of Time Zone
MM: Minute of Time Zone

3. Click on [OK] button to save the new setting and close the window,
or Click [Cancel] button to cancel the new setting and close the window.
NOTE: This function only set Time Zone for the following equipment types.
List of supported equipment types
PASOLINK V4(Bridge NE)
PASOLINK+ STM-1
PASOLINK+ PDH
PASOLINK Mx
PASOLINK+ STM-1(Bridge NE)
PASOLINK+ PDH(Bridge NE)
PASOLINK+ Mx(Bridge NE)
PASOLINK NEO
PASOLINK NEO CPV
PASOLINK NODAL
PASOLINK NEO/a
PASOLINK NEO HP
PASOLINK NEO HP/A
5000S
iPASOLINK 200
iPASOLINK 400
iPASOLINK 1000
5000iPS
iPASOLINK EX
iPASOLINK SX

- 247 -

NWD-104045

2.22 NTP Setting


This function allows the user to set NTP for a bundle of NEs at the same time. This eliminates the
need to set the NTP on the NEs one by one.
To set NTP for NEs:
1. Click on Tools Settings Bundle NTP Setting... on the main menu.

2. In this window, the NTP Server is defined. These parameters are defined in Table 2.103.
Table 2.103 NTP Parameters
Item
IP Address1~4

Definition
NTP Server IP Address.

NTP Version1~4

NTP Server Version: 3 or 4.

Poll Time1~4

Interval of NTP Server:


16[s]
32[s]
1[min]4[s](64[s])
2[min]8[s](128[s])
4[min]16[s](256[s])
8[min]32[s](512[s])
17[min]4[s](1024[s])
34[min]8[s](2048[s])
1[h]8[min]16[s](4096[s])
2[h]16[min]32[s](8192[s])
4[h]33[min]4[s](16384[s])
9[h]6[min]8[s](32768[s])
18[h]12[min]16[s](65536[s])
36[h]24[min]32[s](131072[s])

3. Click on [OK] button to save the new setting and close the window,
or Click [Cancel] button to cancel the new setting and close the window.
NOTE: This function only set NTP for the following equipment types.
When iPASOLINK or ALL OUTDOOR NE exist in the workspace, and the NTP
Server is not set when the Create Configuration is executed, it will result in an error.
Make sure to set the NTP is set for the iPASOLINK and ALL OUTDOOR NE before
executing Create Configuration.
List of supported equipment types
iPASOLINK 200
iPASOLINK 400
iPASOLINK 1000
5000iPS
iPASOLINK EX
iPASOLINK SX

- 248 -

NWD-104045

2.23 SNMP Setting


This function allows the user to set SNMP for a bundle of NEs at the same time.
To set SNMP for NEs:
1. Click on Tools Settings Bundle SNMP Setting... on the main menu.

2. In this window, the SNMP Community is defined. These parameters are defined in Table
2.104.
Table 2.104 SNMP Parameters
Item
Community Name1~10

Definition
Community Name

Access Level1~10

Access Level

Access Control1~10

Access Control

Source IP Address1~10

Source IP Address

Subnet Mask1~10

Subnet Mask

3. Click on [OK] button to save the new setting and close the window,
or Click [Cancel] button to cancel the new setting and close the window.
NOTE: This function only set SNMP for the following equipment types.
List of supported equipment types
iPASOLINK 200
iPASOLINK 400
iPASOLINK 1000
5000iPS
iPASOLINK EX
iPASOLINK SX

- 249 -

NWD-104045

2.24 About Network Configuration Toolj


To verify the version of the NetCfgToolj being used:
1. Click on Help About NetCfgToolj from the main menu of the main window.

2. Click on [OK] button to close the About NetCfgToolj box.

- 250 -

NWD-104045

Multiple CPMC Workspace


In normal operation PNMS can manage more than one CPMC cluster. This section describes the
multiple-CPMC configuration procedure for the PNMS.
By default, the NetCfgToolj opens one workspace during startup. Each workspace represents
one network and each network in turn represents one CPMC cluster or group. The default
workspace is displayed as Network 1 in the NetCfgToolj window.
To add another CPMC cluster or group:
1. Click on Network New. This will open a new workspace in the NetCfgToolj. Note that
each of the newly created workspaces has an asterisk (*) appended to its network name,
for example, Network-1*, Network-2*, etc. the asterisk will disappear once Create
Configuration is executed for this network.

2. Add new workspaces as necessary.

- 251 -

NWD-104045
3. You have to separately configure (Create Configuration) each workspace/network. Select
the network that you wish to configure and then click on Tools Create Configuration.
NOTE: the configuration files cannot be exported until the asterisk (*) in the network name
for all of the network workspaces disappears. Therefore, Export can only be executed
after configuring (Create Configuration) each of the network workspaces.
4. The maximum number of workspaces is 500.

- 252 -

NWD-104045

Appendix A: MIU Settings


To view the NE Properties for the individual MIU you have to double click on the CPMC folder of
the MIU Property Tree. This appendix will explain the naming conventions used in the PMC
setting catalogue shown below.
(2)
(1)

The name of the PMC button is comprised of two distinct parts: (1) PMC type, (2) PMC Usage. The
PMC type can either be RPMC, CPMC or SCPMC depending on the role of the PMC in the HLDC
polling.
The PMC Usage depends on the order of the PMC in the MIU and the redundancy. The table
below illustrates the PMC usage convention used in the MIU.
Total PMC
Total PMC = 1
(Line concentrator/other
equipment with no redundancy).

Redundant System
1+0/1+1

PMC Type/PMC Usage


RPMC Normal
CPMC Normal
SCPMC Normal
N+1
RPMC Protection CH
CPMC Protection CH
SCPMC Protection CH
Line Concentrator/
RPMC Normal
Other Equipment
CPMC Normal
SCPMC Normal
Total PMC >= 2
1+0/1+1
RPMC Additional PMC
N+1
RPMC Regular CH
For N+1 configuration, the default value of the PMC Usage is
Regular CH. When adding new PMCs the user must
individually alter the PMC usage for any additional PMCs
individually in the MIU properties window.
When changing the PMC Usage a warning message will
appear. (i.e. when adding a new PMC on the existing system
the new PMC should be labeled: Additional PMC.)
Line Concentrator
RPMC Additional PMC
The additional PMCs are in a fixed sequence. When deleting a PMC, the NetCfgToolj will first delete
the last PMC to have been added. This means you cannot add an additional PMC without deleting the
PMCs below it first.

- 253 -

NWD-104045

Appendix B: Subnets
Table B1 Available IP Address and Subnet for Managed Network
Subnet Mask
255.255.254.0
(Default)
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.128

Number of available IP address


/subnet
512 (2 class-C subnets)
256 (1 class-C subnet)
128 (2 subnets)

255.255.255.192

64 (4 subnets)

255.255.255.224

32 (8 subnets)

255.255.255.240

16 (16 subnets)

255.255.255.248

8 (32 subnets)

- 254 -

Range

Network Address

(0~511)

xxx.xxx.xxx.0

(0~255)
(0~127)
(128~255)
(0~63)
(64~127)
(128~191)
(192~255)
(0~31)
(32~63)
(64~95)
(96~127)
(128~159)
(160~191)
(192~223)
(224~255)
(0~15)
(16~31)
(32~47)
(48~63)
(64~79)
(80~95)
(96~111)
(112~127)
(128~143)
(144~159)
(160~175)
(176~191)
(192~207)
(208~223)
(224~239)
(240~255)
(0~7)
(8~15)
(16~23)
(24~31)
(32~39)
(40~47)
(48~55)
(56~63)
(64~71)
(72~79)
(80~87)
(88~95)
(96~103)
(104~111)

xxx.xxx.xxx.0
xxx.xxx.xxx.0
xxx.xxx.xxx.128
xxx.xxx.xxx.0
xxx.xxx.xxx.64
xxx.xxx.xxx.128
xxx.xxx.xxx.192
xxx.xxx.xxx.0
xxx.xxx.xxx.32
xxx.xxx.xxx.64
xxx.xxx.xxx.96
xxx.xxx.xxx.128
xxx.xxx.xxx.160
xxx.xxx.xxx.192
xxx.xxx.xxx.224
xxx.xxx.xxx.0
xxx.xxx.xxx.16
xxx.xxx.xxx.32
xxx.xxx.xxx.48
xxx.xxx.xxx.64
xxx.xxx.xxx.80
xxx.xxx.xxx.96
xxx.xxx.xxx.112
xxx.xxx.xxx.128
xxx.xxx.xxx.144
xxx.xxx.xxx.160
xxx.xxx.xxx.176
xxx.xxx.xxx.192
xxx.xxx.xxx.208
xxx.xxx.xxx.224
xxx.xxx.xxx.240
xxx.xxx.xxx.0
xxx.xxx.xxx.8
xxx.xxx.xxx.16
xxx.xxx.xxx.24
xxx.xxx.xxx.32
xxx.xxx.xxx.40
xxx.xxx.xxx.48
xxx.xxx.xxx.56
xxx.xxx.xxx.64
xxx.xxx.xxx.72
xxx.xxx.xxx.80
xxx.xxx.xxx.88
xxx.xxx.xxx.96
xxx.xxx.xxx.104

NWD-104045
Subnet Mask

255.255.255.252

Number of available IP address


/subnet

Range
(112~119)
(120~127)
(128~135)
(136~143)
(144~151)
(152~159)
(160~167)
(168~175)
(176~183)
(184~191)
(192~199)
(200~207)
(208~215)
(216~223)
(224~231)
(232~239)
(240~247)
(248~255)
(0~3)
(4~7)
(8~11)
(12~15)
(16~19)
(20~23)
(24~27)
(28~31)
(32~35)
(36~39)
(40~43)
(44~47)
(48~51)
(52~55)
(56~59)
(60~63)
(64~67)
(68~71)
(72~75)
(76~79)
(80~83)
(84~87)
(88~91)
(92~95)
(96~99)
(100~103)
(104~107)
(108~111)
(112~115)
(116~119)
(120~123)
(124~127)

4 (64 subnets)

- 255 -

Network Address
xxx.xxx.xxx.112
xxx.xxx.xxx.120
xxx.xxx.xxx.128
xxx.xxx.xxx.136
xxx.xxx.xxx.144
xxx.xxx.xxx.152
xxx.xxx.xxx.160
xxx.xxx.xxx.168
xxx.xxx.xxx.176
xxx.xxx.xxx.184
xxx.xxx.xxx.192
xxx.xxx.xxx.200
xxx.xxx.xxx.208
xxx.xxx.xxx.216
xxx.xxx.xxx.224
xxx.xxx.xxx.232
xxx.xxx.xxx.240
xxx.xxx.xxx.248
xxx.xxx.xxx.0
xxx.xxx.xxx.4
xxx.xxx.xxx.8
xxx.xxx.xxx.12
xxx.xxx.xxx.16
xxx.xxx.xxx.20
xxx.xxx.xxx.24
xxx.xxx.xxx.28
xxx.xxx.xxx.32
xxx.xxx.xxx.36
xxx.xxx.xxx.40
xxx.xxx.xxx.44
xxx.xxx.xxx.48
xxx.xxx.xxx.60
xxx.xxx.xxx.56
xxx.xxx.xxx.56
xxx.xxx.xxx.64
xxx.xxx.xxx.68
xxx.xxx.xxx.72
xxx.xxx.xxx.76
xxx.xxx.xxx.80
xxx.xxx.xxx.84
xxx.xxx.xxx.88
xxx.xxx.xxx.92
xxx.xxx.xxx.96
xxx.xxx.xxx.100
xxx.xxx.xxx.104
xxx.xxx.xxx.108
xxx.xxx.xxx.112
xxx.xxx.xxx.116
xxx.xxx.xxx.120
xxx.xxx.xxx.124

NWD-104045
Subnet Mask

Number of available IP address


/subnet

Range
(128~131)
(132~135)
(136~139)
(140~143)
(144~147)
(148~151)
(152~155)
(156~159)
(160~163)
(164~167)
(168~171)
(172~175)
(176~179)
(180~183)
(184~187)
(188~191)
(192~195)
(196~199)
(200~203)
(204~207)
(208~211)
(212~215)
(216~219)
(220~223)
(224~227)
(228~231)
(232~235)
(236~239)
(240~243)
(244~247)
(248~251)
(252~255)

- 256 -

Network Address
xxx.xxx.xxx.128
xxx.xxx.xxx.132
xxx.xxx.xxx.136
xxx.xxx.xxx.140
xxx.xxx.xxx.144
xxx.xxx.xxx.148
xxx.xxx.xxx.152
xxx.xxx.xxx.156
xxx.xxx.xxx.160
xxx.xxx.xxx.164
xxx.xxx.xxx.168
xxx.xxx.xxx.172
xxx.xxx.xxx.176
xxx.xxx.xxx.180
xxx.xxx.xxx.184
xxx.xxx.xxx.188
xxx.xxx.xxx.192
xxx.xxx.xxx.196
xxx.xxx.xxx.200
xxx.xxx.xxx.204
xxx.xxx.xxx.208
xxx.xxx.xxx.212
xxx.xxx.xxx.216
xxx.xxx.xxx.220
xxx.xxx.xxx.224
xxx.xxx.xxx.228
xxx.xxx.xxx.232
xxx.xxx.xxx.236
xxx.xxx.xxx.240
xxx.xxx.xxx.244
xxx.xxx.xxx.240
xxx.xxx.xxx.252

NWD-104045

Appendix C: Configuration of Dual Master MIU


At MIU (Line Concentrator) two ports, NMS port and DPU port are available. By default
NetCfgToolj assigns NMS port for the line connection, when the Back-to-Back (BB) line is added.
Please use the Line Properties dialog box to change the port selection. Note that in the dual
master configuration, only 1 port can be assigned to NMS and 1 other port needs to be assigned
to DPU. Otherwise, errors may occur when you run Create Configuration.
Configuration of dual master MIU is described (as illustrated in the example):
DPU
NMS

1. As illustrated in the figure below, place all the


NE symbols in the workspace first, connect
them with MIU using BB line.

2. As shown in the figure above the


connections from No.002 and No.007
to No.001 are both assigned to NMS
port. You need to use the Line
Properties dialog box to convert one of
the NMS ports into a DPU port as
illustrated in the figure below.

3. After the line properties are modified, MIU


(No.001) will be assigned with 1 NMS port
and 1 DPU port. Configuring (Create
Configuration) will then be possible.

- 257 -

NWD-104045

Appendix D: Incorrect Configuration of MIU (Line Concentrator)


To setup MIU (Line Concentrator) in a Multi-Drop configuration, please use DPU port on the
Master side of the Multi-Drop connection. This is due to the MIU hardware limitations.
1. As illustrated in the figure below, since DPU port is assigned on the Master side of the
Multi-Drop, this is a correct configuration and configuring (Create Configuration) would
be possible.

NMS

DPU

Multi-Drop Connection
2. The configuration below is prohibited. Create Configuration will result in error, since MIU
(No.007) may not be set to DPU Port on the Slave side of the Multi-Drop connection.

NMS

DPU

- 258 -

NWD-104045

Appendix E: Incorrect Configuration of PASOLINK Mx / PASOLINK+


+

The following configuration is not possible in a mixed network of PASOLINK Mx/PASOLINK and
+
PASOLINKV3/PASOLINKV4/Paso-S/MIU NEs, when PASOLINK Mx/PASOLINK NEs are
placed close to the PNMS, and are followed by PASOLINKV3/PASOLINKV4/Paso-S/MIU.
1. Otherwise errors may occur during configuring (Create Configuration) due to the ASYNC
+
(19.2kbps) IC limitation of the PASOLINK Mx/PASOLINK .
+

As illustrated in the example below, No.007 (PASOLINK ) is connected to No.009


+
(PASOLINK V3). No.009 becomes CPM, and its connection with No.007 (PASOLINK ) is
+
assigned to use PPP Protocol (19.2 kbps); however, the PASOLINK , No.005 and No.007
connection uses HDLC Protocol (19.2 kbps). As a result, in the No.007, a ASYNC
(19.2kbps) IC is required to serve two different protocols, which is not possible.
Instead, SYNC (64kbps) IC is used for the connection.

HDLC
19.2 kbps
PPP
19.2 kbps

- 259 -

NWD-104045
2. To change the connection of No.005 and No.007 from ASYNC to SYNC, please use the
Line Properties dialog box. Please change the port for No.005 from NE2 to NE1.

3. After the line properties are modified, the configuration will be shown as below and
configuring (Create Configuration) will then be possible.

HDLC
64 kbps
PPP
19.2 kbps

- 260 -

NWD-104045

Appendix F: NMS Port Setting of MIU (Line Concentrator / Hop)


If an MIU (Line Concentrator or Hop type) is included in your system configuration, please confirm
the following points related to MIU setting.
+

1. When the MIU (Line Concentrator or Hop type) is connected as a PASOLINK or


PASOLINK Mx multi-drop connection, please confirm that the NMS port is set for each MIU,
for example, the connection of No.003 and No.004 in Pattern 1 or No.003 and No.005 in
Pattern2.
<Pattern 1>

NE2

<Pattern 2>

NMS

NE2

NMS

2. Confirm that Connect Port of each MIU is set to NMS by opening Line Properties
between No.003 and No.004 in Pattern 1 or between No.003 and No.005 in Pattern 2.

- 261 -

NWD-104045
3. In the above example, please confirm that both MIUs do not have the same NMS Port
setting, by opening the Port category in NE Properties. If they are set to the same mode
please reset the NMS Port mode for the CPM by selecting the Manual mode in the
Mode Auto Assign setting from the Port category in NE Properties, so that the NMS
Ports of both MIUs can communicate by connecting them with a straight cable.

NOTE: When a 2 system (NE) type MIU is used in the above configuration, please be sure
that the Connect Port setting for both NEs is NMS and that the Mode setting of one
NMS Port is RS485_TX and the other is RS485_RX or vice versa. If the same mode
is set to both NMS Ports, the NMS Ports cannot communicate, because the NMS Ports
for both NEs are internally connected by straight cable.

- 262 -

NWD-104045
The dotted square in the following figures shows examples of usage for 2 system (NE) type MIU.

NMS

NMS

NMS

NMS

NMS

NMS

- 263 -

NWD-104045

Appendix G: Incorrect Configuration of PASOLINK NEO (or iPASOLINK or ALL


OUTDOOR) / PASOLINK Mx (Bridge NE) / PASOLINK+ STM-1 (Bridge NE) /
PASOLINK+ PDH (Bridge NE) (No.1)
A hub must be used when PASOLINK NEO (or iPASOLINK or ALL OUTDOOR) is to be
connected to two (or more) NE(Bridge NE) in a network configuration where both PASOLINK
NEO (or iPASOLINK or ALL OUTDOOR) and PASOLINK Mx(Bridge
NE)/PASOLINK+STM-1(Bridge NE)/PASOLINK+PDH(Bridge NE) coexist.
1.

Without a hub link between PASOLINK NEO (or iPASOLINK or ALL OUTDOOR) and
PASOLINK+ NE, the Create Configuration feature cannot function properly.
The following diagram shows such a case: No.005 (PASOLINK NEO) is connected to
No.003 (PASOLINK Mx [Bridge NE]), and No.007 (PASOLINK Mx [Bridge NE]). Since No.
003 is connected to No. 005 via the EM1 connecting port and No. 007 is connected via the
EM2, if a hub were not used, a LAN connection with cross-cables would be necessary.
Since, this is not technically possible there is no other alternative to using a hub.

SYNC connection

Mx

Mx

Mx

Mx

NEO

NEO

Mx

Mx

LAN connection
(cross cable)

No.003
connecting port:
EM1

No.007
connecting port:
EM2

2. To change the port with which No.005 is connected to No.007, use the Line Properties
dialog box. Please change the port of No.005 from (EM2") to ("EM1").

- 264 -

NWD-104045
3. After changing the line setting, configuring (Create Configuration) will be possible (however,
the display on the screen does not change) because interconnection between NEs will now
be via hub.

SYNC connection

Mx

Mx
H
U
B

Mx

Mx

NEO

NEO

Mx

Mx

LAN connection

No.003
connecting port:
EM1

No.007
connecting port:
EM1

- 265 -

NWD-104045

Appendix H: Incorrect Configuration of iPASOLINK/ ALL OUTDOOR/ PASOLINK


NEO/ PASOLINK Mx (Bridge NE) / PASOLINK+ STM-1 (Bridge NE) / PASOLINK+ PDH
(Bridge NE) (No.2)
When a hub is used for the Back-to-Back connection of NE, it is necessary to extend two or more
connected lines from NE on the side near PNMS, and to connect it with other NE.
1. Otherwise, the Create Configuration feature cannot function properly.
When a hub is used as in the following example linking No.002, (PASOLINK NEO), No.004,
(PASOLINK NEO) and No.005 (PASOLINK NEO), it is not possible to extend two or more
connected lines from No.002 (PASOLINK NEO).
Instead, it is necessary to change the connection mode shown on the screen (case 1) or to
change to a hub-less connection (case 2).

LAN connection
NEO

NEO

NEO

NEO

H
U
B

NEO

NEO

No.002 connecting
port: EM1

case 1: method to change the connection mode in above diagram


1. To remove the connecting line between No.002 andNo.004, select Line Delete.

2. Connect No.004 and No.005.

No.005
connecting port:
EM1

- 266 -

NWD-104045
3. After changing the line setting, interconnection between NEs will not be changed; but,
the screen will change (as shown below) and configuring (Create Configuration)
will be possible.
LAN connection
NEO

NEO

H
U
B

NEO

NEO

NEO

NEO

No.005
connecting port:
EM1

case 2: to change to a hub-less connection scheme Hub


1. Use the Line Properties dialog box to change the port via which No.002 is connected
with No.004. Please change the port of No.002 from (EM1") to ("EM2").

2. After changing the line setting, configuring (Create Configuration) will be possible
(however, the display on the screen does not change) because interconnection
between NEs will not be via hub.
No.002
connecting port:
EM1
LAN connection
NEO

NEO

NEO

NEO

NEO

LAN connection
(cross cable)

NEO

No.002
connecting port:
EM2

- 267 -

NWD-104045

Appendix I: Incorrect Configuration of PASOLINK NEO / iPASOLINK / ALL


OUTDOOR
When PASOLINK NEO / iPASOLINK / ALL OUTDOOR is connected with PNMS, it is not
possible to have a network configuration where NE are connected via the EM1 port for
PASOLINK NEO and NMS port for iPASOLINK/ALL OUTDOOR to
No.001
others (e.g. PASOLINK NEO or PASOLINK+).
connecting port:
EM1

1. Otherwise, (due to the PASOLINK NEO connecting port EM1


being used) the Create Configuration feature cannot function
properly.
As can be seen from the example below, No.001
(PASOLINK NEO) being connected to PNMS would be
the Root NE, and also No.001 being connected to No.003
(PASOLINK NEO) via its EM1 port. This would require
that No.001which be connected to PNMS and No.003 via
one and the same port (EM1), which is technically
impossible. Therefore, it would be necessary to use a
different connecting port (EM2).
2. Use the Line Properties dialog box to change the port via which No.001 is connected with
No.003. Please change the port of No.001 from (EM1") to ("EM2").

3. After changing the line setting, configuring (Create


Configuration) will be possible (however, the display on
the screen does not change).

- 268 -

No.001
connecting port:
EM2

NWD-104045

Appendix J: How to Change Standard PASOLINK Mx / PASOLINK+ STM-1 /


PASOLINK+ PDH Configuration to PASOLINK Mx (Bridge NE) / PASOLINK+ STM-1
(Bridge NE) / PASOLINK+ PDH (Bridge NE)
1. With NetConfigToolj execute the following procedure:
(1) From the menu, select and execute File-Open to open the network configuration file
(*.nct) already existing in PNMSj.

(2) Change the Paso+/Mx to Bridge NE mode (pls. refer to section 2.9.7).
NOTE: Subnet mask and IP address are automatically reset.
(3) From the menu, select and execute Tools-Create Configuration to update the network
configuration file (*.nct).
(4) From the menu, select and execute File-Save or File-Save As to save the updated
network configuration file (*.nct).

(5) From the menu, select and execute File-Export-Configuration Files for PM Card to
update the PMC network configuration files (*.cfg).

- 269 -

NWD-104045
2.

Perform the following for the respective actual NE.

(1) Using the PNMTj Download feature, download the Bridge NE mode PMC Program file to
each respective NE.
NOTE: Use only program files that correspond to
one of the following versions (or newer).
(a) STM-1 : version 1.6.2
(b) PDH : version 1.2.2
(c) Mx

: version 1.2.4

(2) Using the PNMTj Reset feature, reset the CPU for each of the respective NE from step
(1).
NOTE: When resetting, be sure that the ROM (Program) switching checkbox is
checked.

(3) Using the PNMTj Version display feature, verify that the PASOLINK versions of the
downloaded NE are correct.

(4) Using the PNMTj Download feature, download the PMC network configuration file (*.cfg)
that was updated using NetConfigToolj.

- 270 -

NWD-104045
(5) Rewire the actual connections for each respective actual NE wherever Async cable is
replaced by LAN cable in Tools-Create Configuration of NetConfigToolj.
In the following examples, when changing NEs to Bridge NE mode, the back-to-back
connecting cables between the NEs in the red circle (No.003, No.005, and No.007) are
automatically changed from Async to LAN cable and the connecting port is changed
from NE1/NE2 to LAN.
Proceed to the respective NE locations and change the connecting line from Async to
LAN cable and the connecting port to LAN.
NOTE: Since the LAN port only has one outlet, a repeater hub should be used for
Back-to-Back connection to two or more NEs.
Since, the Sync cable can be used as is, there is no need to change to LAN cable.
Before

After

Sync
Mx

Mx

Async

Sync

Mx

Mx

Mx

Mx

Mx

Mx

Mx

Async

Mx

H
U
B

Mx

Mx

Mx

Mx

Mx

Mx

(6) Using the PNMTj Search for Network Element feature, verify that all NEs are properly
displayed.
NOTE: Using this feature requires a license.

- 271 -

NWD-104045
3. Execute the following in PNMSj.
(1) From the menu, select and execute NetworkConfiguration-Update to import the
network configuration file (*.nct) that was updated using NetConfigToolj.

(2) Verify that PNMSj is properly detecting/monitoring all NEs.

- 272 -

NWD-104045

Appendix K: How to change PASOLINK Mx (Bridge NE) / PASOLINK+ STM-1


(Bridge NE) / PASOLINK+ PDH (Bridge NE) to NEO
1. With NetConfigToolj execute the following procedure:
(1) From the menu, select and execute File-Open to open the network configuration file
(*.nct) already existing in PNMSj.

(2) Change from Paso+/Mx Bridge NE mode to PASOLINK NEO (HOP) mode.
(pls. refer to section 2.9.8)
NOTE: As regards subnet mask and IP address, the preset values are given priority.
(3) From the menu, select and execute Tools-Create Configuration...and update network
configuration file (*.nct).

(4) From the menu, select and execute File-Save or File-Save As to save the updated
network configuration file (*.nct).

(5) From the menu, select and execute File-Export-Configuration Files for PM Card to
update the PMC network configuration files (*.cfg).

- 273 -

NWD-104045
2. Perform the following for the respective actual NE.
(1) Actually change all the NE to NEO that were already changed (to NEO) in the screen.
(2) Rewire the actual connections for each respective actual NE wherever Sync cable is
replaced by LAN cable in Tools-Create Configuration of NetConfigToolj.
In the following examples, when changing NEs to NEO, the back-to-back connecting
cables between the NEs in the red circle (No.002 and No.003) are automatically
changed from Sync to LAN cable and the connecting port is changed from NE1 to EM1
(NMS) / EM2 (NE).
Proceed to the respective NE locations and change the connecting line from Sync to
LAN cable and the connecting port to EM1 (NMS) / EM2 (NE).
NOTE: Use repeater hub connection when the Back-to-Back connecting line from
NEO connects to two or more NEs (i.e. Bridge NE mode NE).
Before

After

Sync

Mx

Mx

H
U
B

Mx

Mx

Mx

Mx

Mx

Mx

Mx

Mx

H
U
B

NEO

NEO

Mx

Mx

Mx

Mx

(3) Using the PNMTj Download feature, download the Bridge NE mode NEO (PMC)
Program file to each respective NE.
NOTE: Use only program files that correspond to the following version (or newer).
(a) NEO:

version 2.0.9

- 274 -

NWD-104045
(4) Using the PNMTj Reset feature, reset the CPU for each of the respective NE from step
(3).
NOTE: When resetting, be sure that the ROM (Program) switching checkbox is
checked.

(5)

Using the PNMTj Version display feature, verify that the PASOLINK versions of the
downloaded NE are correct.

(6) Using the PNMTj Download feature, download the PMC network configuration file (*.cfg)
that was updated using NetConfigToolj.

NOTE: Every NE whose file name is displayed in the Changed Configuration file
(s) column of the NetConfigToolj Changed NEs List is subject to said
downloading of Network configuration file (*.cfg).

- 275 -

NWD-104045
(7) Using the PNMTj Search for Network Element feature, verify that all NEs are properly
displayed.
NOTE: Using this feature requires a license.

3. Execute the following in PNMSj.

From the menu, select and execute NetworkConfiguration-Update to import the


network configuration file (*.nct) that was updated using NetConfigToolj.

Verify that PNMSj is properly detecting/monitoring all NEs.

- 276 -

NWD-104045

Appendix L: Restrictions and limitations of PASOLINK NEO NODAL


1. Interconnecting IDUs
- All IDU fixed line interconnections must be EM2 (NE) to EM 1 (NMS).
For instance, in a four IDU configuration, EM1 and EM2 are used for NEO NODAL
Group Interconnections and are thus not available; but, EM1 of the top IDU and EM2 of the
bottom (end) IDU are available to be used.
available

This red line is only for illustration purposes.


(it does not actually appear on the screen)

available

The following example shows intermediate IDU #3 when it is E1-Tributary Only.


E1-Tributary Only IDU does not have Port as Radio. Moreover, no Port is available to
be used, since, both EM1 and EM2 are already in use. Therefore, there is no Port
configuration for IDU3.

In this example, IDU#3 and IDU#4


are E1 Tributary Onlyconfiguration.

- 277 -

NWD-104045
2. Connecting PNMS Line to NODAL Group
- The PNMS Line can only be connected to IDU#1for the Create Configuration tool to
function properly (in-feed only possible via top IDU).

3. Ring configuration is not permitted


- The following ring configuration is not permitted.

- 278 -

NWD-104045

4. Connecting to a NODAL Group comprising only a single IDU


Because the PNMS Line would be connected to the NODAL EM2, the Create Configuration
tool will not function properly.

- 279 -

NWD-104045
5. Async Line connection
An Async Line can only be connected via IDU #1.

- 280 -

NWD-104045

Appendix M: Restrictions and limitations on configuring Ring by NEO STD and


NEO HP/A NEs
1. Supported Configurations
1.1 Ring configuration containing Root NE.

Root NE

NOTE: Ring containing Root NE (Bridge) can not be supported.

1.2 Ring configuration not containing Root NE.

- 281 -

NWD-104045

1.3 Ring configuration containing PASOLINK and PASOLINK+ series.

1.4 Network configuration containing multiple rings.

- 282 -

NWD-104045

1.5 LAN port must be used to establish a direct connection with NEs inside the ring.

Please refer to 2 examples shown below.


Example 1:

NOTE: Configuration shown below is not allowed since radio ports are
used to establish direct connection with NEs inside the ring.
As an alternative to this restricted configuration, please use
configuration shown above.

(Change LAN connection from No.004 -> No.005 to


LAN connection from No.004 -> No.002.
Change LAN connection from No.009 -> No.006 to
LAN connection from No.009 -> No.007.)

- 283 -

NWD-104045

Example 2:

NOTE: Configuration shown below is not allowed since radio ports are
used to establish direct connection with NEs inside the ring.
As an alternative to this restricted configuration, please use
configuration shown above.

(Change LAN connection from No.003 -> No.005 to


LAN connection from No.003 -> No.004.
Change LAN connection from No.007 -> No.006 to
LAN connection from No.007 -> No.010.)

- 284 -

NWD-104045

2. Unsupported Configurations
2.1 Configuration containing a single NE being a part of multiple Rings is not supported.

2.2 NEO STD or NEO HP/A connected via ASYNC connection is not supported.

ASYNC

2.3 RING configuration containing other equipments is not supported.

- 285 -

NWD-104045

2.4 Mesh configuration is not supported.

2.5 Ring configuration containing Root NE (Bridge) is not supported.

Root NE(Bridge)

- 286 -

NWD-104045

3. List of restricted items in Ring configuration


Item
Number of NEs within a Ring
Topology
Connection to other equipments
Relationship between Ring and
subnet
Relationship between Ring and
NE
Types of NE within a Ring

CTRL F/W Version

Restrictions
From 3 up to 62 maximum.
Ring supported.
Mesh not supported.
Connection to other equipments within a loop is not supported.
Connection to other equipments outside of a loop is supported.
Configuration is supported when only 1 Ring is found within a subnet
and all NEs within that subnet are found inside that Ring.
Configuration with any NE being a part of multiple numbers of Rings
is not supported.
Supported: Root NE (Unbridge)/ Branch NE (2branchs)/ Branch NE
(3branchs)/ Normal NE
Not supported: Root NE (Bridge)
NEO STD: Supported from 3.18.0.
NEO HP/A: Supported from 2.0.3.

- 287 -

NWD-104045

Appendix N: Restrictions and limitations on configuring Ring by iPASOLINK


NEs and ALL OUTDOOR NEs
1.

Supported Configurations

1.1 Ring configuration containing iPASOLINK series and ALL OUTDOOR series is
supported.

1.2 Network configuration containing multiple rings of different equipment types is


supported.

2.

Unsupported Configurations

2.1 Ring configuration containing PASOLINK series, PASOLINK+ series or PASOLINK NEO
series is not supported.

2.2 Ring configuration containing iPASOLINK SX NE(s) and also LAN connection (the blue
back-to-back line) is not supported.

- 288 -

NWD-104045

3.

List of restricted items in Ring configuration

Item
Number of NEs within a Ring
Topology
Connection to other equipments

Relationship between Ring and


subnet

4.

Restrictions
From 3 up to 62 maximum.
Ring supported.
Mesh supported.
Connection to other equipments(PASOLINK series, PASOLINK+
series or PASOLINK NEO series) within a loop is not supported.
Connection to other equipments outside of a loop is supported.
Configuration is supported when only 1 Ring is found within a subnet
and all NEs within that subnet are found inside that Ring.

List of product series

Series
PASOLINK

PASOLINK+

PASOLINK NEO

iPASOLINK

ALL OUTDOOR

NE Type
PASOLINK V3
PASOLINK V4
MIU(Line Concentrator)
MIU
PASOLINK V4(Bridge NE)
PASOLINK Mx
PASOLINK+ STM-1
PASOLINK+ PDH
PASOLINK NEO
PASOLINK NEO CPV
PASOLINK NEO NODAL
PASOLINK NEO/a
PASOLINK NEO HP
PASOLINK NEO HP/A
5000S
PASOLINK Mx(Bridge NE)
PASOLINK+ STM-1(Bridge NE)
PASOLINK+ PDH(Bridge NE)
iPASOLINK 200
iPASOLINK 400
iPASOLINK 1000
5000iPS
iPASOLINK EX
iPASOLINK SX

- 289 -

NWD-104045

Appendix O: How to connect iPASOLINK series to PASOLINK series by Async


connection
With NetConfigToolj execute the following procedure:
1.

In the workspace, connect the NE of iPASOLINK to the NE of PASOLINK by BBLine


connection.

2.

From the menu, select and execute Tools Create Configuration...

3.

In the workspace, the BBLine connection automatically changes to Async connection


between NEs.

NOTE: With regards to V4 equipment, only FW versions supported are 5.02 and
higher.

- 290 -

NWD-104045

Appendix P: Configuration of bridge NE and PASOLINK series


The bridge series NE (iPASOLINK series, NEO series, PASO+(Bridge NE), PASO (Bridge NE)) can be
configured with PASOLINK series NE in one network. This network configuration is now supported from
this version (1.07.006.002 or later).

- 291 -

NWD-104045

Appendix Q: SNTP Configuration for networks with iPASOLINK/ ALL OUTDOOR


For networks that contain iPASOLINK 200/400/1000 NE(s), iPASOLINK EX/SX NE(s) or 5000iPS
NE(s), it is necessary to configure the SNTP setting of the Root-NE/Root NE(Bridge) in order for the
NEs to get time zone information from external SNTP server. The Root-NE/Root NE(Bridge) can be
PASOLINK NEO series or PASOLINK+ series. The PNMSj does not support time-server function for
the iPASOLINK or ALL OUTDOOR NEs, therefore, the SNTP setting (IP address, and Refresh Interval)
must be set. The detailed steps are provided below:
To change the SNTP Parameters of Root NE/Root NE(Bridge) :
1. Right click on the selected NE to display the context menu.
(Or double click on the selected NE to open the NE Properties window.)
2. Click on Properties to open the NE Properties window.
3. The NE Properties window will appear. Click on the SNTP category to display the
SNTP parameters.
4. On the ensuing window, select Other. Once selected, the IP Address and Refresh
Interval input boxes will be available. Input the IP address of the external SNTP server
and the desired Refresh Interval in seconds.

iPASOLINK 200

NEO STD

- 292 -

NWD-104045

Appendix R: iPASOLINK 400 NE1 port by DCN


When iPASOLINK 400 NE1 Port is used for DCN, it is necessary to set NE1 port to Management Port
using LCT. But from FW version 03.00.37 of iPASOLINK 400, it is not necessary to set. The detailed
steps are mentioned below:

To change the NE1 Port mode of iPASOLINK 400 NE(s) by LCT:

1. Using the LCT Management setup function, set NE1 port mode to Management
Port.Click Equipment Setup -> Network Management Configuration -> General
Setting(Detail) from the menu.
2. Using the LCT Download function, download the Network Config file to each NE.Click
Equipment Utility -> Update(Storage -> NE) Utility from the menu.
NOTE: The sequence of the procedure should be done exactly as shown above.

NMS
NE1

LCT

- 293 -

NWD-104045

Appendix S: Adding iPASOLINK 100E NE using NCT workaround mode


This procedure explains how to add iPASOLINK 100E NE's in the network using the NCT. Since
currently, the NCT does not support directly adding the iPASOLINK 100E to the network, the
iPASOLINK 100E NE has to be added as iPASOLINK 200 first in the NCT. The detailed steps is as
follows:

Create the network using NetConfigToolj.


1. Launch the NetConfigToolj application.
NOTE: NetConfigToolj Rev.1.007.006.003 is required.
2. When adding iPASOLINK 100E NE's in the network add it using iPASOLINK 200
template on the NCT map.
3. Once the NE's and NE are added, execute "Create Configuration" function.
4. Export cfg file for the NE's.
5. Save the NCT file.
6. Close the NetConfigToolj application.

Case1

Radio

100E

100E
PNMSj

Router

- 294 -

Radio

100E

100E

NWD-104045

Adding iPASOLINK 100E NE

Select iPASOLINK 200(Hop)

The iPASOLINK 100E


NE be added as
iPASOLINK 200

Adding other NEs

iPASOLINK 100E

- 295 -

iPASOLINK 100E

NWD-104045

Case2

Radio

Radio

100E
PNMSj

100E

NEO

NEO

Router
Radio

CPV

CPV

NEO STD
iPASOLINK 100E
NEO CPV

iPASOLINK 100E is shown as the iPASOLINK 100 symbols in PNMSj maps.

iPASOLINK 100

- 296 -

NWD-104045

Appendix T: Unsupported Configuration in iPASOLINK 100E network


NOTE: iPASOLINK 100E has only one (1) physical port for NMS it is not possible to create a
multi-drop connection. NE1 port is shown in the drop down menu, but it is NOT a valid port and should
not be selected. Only NMS port can be used in this case.

Radio

100E

100E

Radio

100E

Router
PNMSj

iPASOLINK 100E

iPASOLINK 100E

connecting port: NMS

- 297 -

100E

NWD-104045

Appendix U: Unsupported Configuration of iPASOLINK 1000


Please only configurate iPASOLINK series NE between the top NE and iPASOLINK 1000.
1.

Supported Configurations

iPASOLINK 400 iPASOLINK 400

iPASOLINK 200

iPASOLINK 200 iPASOLINK 1000

Only iPASOLINK series is be supported

2.

Unsupported Configurations

iPASOLINK 400 iPASOLINK 400

PASOLINK+ STM1

iPASOLINK 200

iPASOLINK 1000

PASOLINK+ series is not supported

iPASOLINK 400 iPASOLINK 400

PASOLINK V4

iPASOLINK 200

iPASOLINK 1000

PASOLINK series is not supported

NOTE: Although the following configuration can be made in NetConfigToolj, it is not supported.
iPASOLINK 400 iPASOLINK 400

NEO STD

NEO series is not supported

- 298 -

iPASOLINK 200

iPASOLINK 1000

NWD-104045

Appendix V: How to set the iPASOLINK 1000 of system varying in each direction
In case of using the iPASOLINK 1000 of system varying in each direction, please do the following:

1. Using the LCT Download funtion, download the Network Config file to each NE.Click
Equipment Utility -> Update(Storage -> NE) Utility from the menu.

2. Using the LCT Management setup function, set equipment configuration.

3. Using the LCT Management setup function, set network configuration.

NOTE: The sequence of the procedure should be done exactly as shown above.

1+1 System

1+0 System

- 299 -

NWD-104045

Appendix W: Duplicate Checking of MIB Load NE IP Address


When using the PNMSjs MIB Load, on occasion of monitoring the NetConfigToolj unsupported
equipments, in order not to allocate IP addresses of unsupported equipments, in this application need
to check duplicate IP addresses.

1. On the map, new the NetConfigToolj supported NEs, then run Create Configuration.

2. To import MIB Load NE IP Address:


Please prepare a CSV file, which contains MIB Load NE IP Addresses.
MIB Load NE IP Addresses are described as follows.

(1) Open the Network Element List dialog.


(2) Click [Import] button, then the Import MIB Load NE IP Address dialog will be show.
(3) Click [ ... ] button to select the *.csv file, which contains MIB Load NE IP Addresses.

(4) Click [Apply] button to start the import process. After it is finished, MIB Load NE IP
Addresses will be listed at the Network Element List dialog.

- 300 -

NWD-104045

NOTE: The imported *.csv file format is : when there is nothing on the map, in the
Network Element List dialog, the [Save] button is pressed to export the file format.

3. To check duplicate IP address:


(1) When the Import MIB Load NE IP Address dialog is closed, the program will check
duplicate IP addresses automatically;
(2) At the Network Element List dialog, click [Check] button to start checking. After
checking, duplicate IP addresses will be showed with yellow line.
(3) At the Check Duplicate IP Address dialog, Click [Save] button to save the duplicate IP
addresses result to csv file.
(4) When there are duplicate IP addresses, if the imported csv file changes, or the IP
address of NE Properties changes and duplicate marks disappear, ought to Check
again.(Once the IP address of NE Properties changes, Create Configuration must be
done again.)

- 301 -

NWD-104045

4. To save Network Element List that contains MIB Load NE IP Address


(1) In the Network Element List dialog, when it contains MIB Load NE IP Address, press
[Save] button to save one *.csv file, which contains MIB Load NE IP Address.
(2) In PNMSj, when register MIB Load NE, please refer to the saved Network Element List
file.

NOTE: The application will keep MIB Load NE IP Address all the way, until it is close.
While the *.nct file does not contain MIB Load NE IP Address, therefore, when the
application restarts, the *.csv file that contains MIB Load NE IP Address should be
imported again.

- 302 -

NWD-104045

Appendix X: Changed Configuration files of 5000iPS


If the nct file created by the lower version of NetCfgToolj than 1.07.010.001, when it is opened by the
NetCfgToolj of version 1.07.010.001 or higher, the network configuration files of 5000iPS NE(s) are
changed. If the network contains 5000iPS NE(s), please open the Changed NEs List dialog to confirm
the change.
Case:
1, The network below is created by the NetCfgToolj of version 1.07.008.002, now open it by the
NetCfgToolj of version 1.07.010.001.

2, Open the Changed NEs List dialog, it shows that 5000iPS-network.cfg files are changed.

- 303 -

Вам также может понравиться